D

OPERATOR'S MANUAL
MARINE RADAR

MODEL FAR/FR-2805 Series

Radar ARPA Bacic Spec.

( ) FR-2815 ( ) FAR-2815 X-band, 12 kW, TR up

( ) FR-2825 ( ) FAR-2825 X-band, 25 kW, TR up
( ) FR-2855 ( ) FAR-2855 X-band, 50 kW, TR up
( ) FR-2825W ( ) FAR-2825W X-band, 25 kW, TR down
( ) FR-2855W ( ) FAR-2855W X-band, 50 kW, TR down
( ) FR-2835S ( ) FAR-2835S S-band, 30 kW, TR up
( ) FR-2835SW ( ) FAR-2835SW S-band, 30 kW, TR down
( ) FR-2865SW ( ) FAR-2865SW S-band, 60 kW, TR down
( ) FA-2805 Add-on ARPA

0 FURUNO ELECTRIC CO„ LTD.

NISHINOMIYA , JAPAN

PRINTED IN JAPAN
C FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
O Your Local Agent/Dealer

9-52, Ashihara -cho,

Nishinomiya, Japan

Telephone: 0 7 9 8 - 6 5 - 2111
Telefax: 0798-65-4200

All rights reserved. FIRST EDITION : AUG. 1995

Printed in Japan
X2 : FEB . 22, 200 2

P U B . N o . O M E -3 4 0 4 0
(Y O S H) FAR/FR-2805 SERIES

* 00080722300 *
* OME34040X20 *
 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER
Before turning on the radar, make sure that there is no one near the
scanner unit.

Serious injury or even death may result if a rotating antenna strikes

someone standing nearby.

WARNING
Radio Frequency Radiation Hazard
The radar antenna emits electromagnetic radio frequency (RF) energy which can be
harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never look directly into the antenna aperture from a
close distance while the radar is in operation or expose yourself to the transmitting
antenna at a close distance.

Radiator Distance to Distance to RF power density on

Model
type 100 W/m2 point 10 W/m2 point antenna aperture
XN12AF (4') 11.0 W/m2
FR-2815 Worst case Worst case
(X-band, 12 kW) XN20AF (6.5') 0.25 m* 2.3 m* 9.6 W/m2
XN24AF (8') 9.6 W/m2
XN12AF (4') 29.0 W/m2
FR-2825/2825W Worst case Worst case
(X-band, 25 kW) XN20AF (6.5') 0.6 m* 3.25 m* 23.8 W/m2
XN24AF (8') 23.8 W/m2
FR-2855/2855W XN3A (6.5') Nil 2.0m 76.0 W/m2
X-band,50KW
XN4A (8') Nil 1.9m 64.0W/m2
XN5A (10') Nil 1.8m 50.0W/m2
FR-2835S/2835SW SN30AF (10') Nil 1.06 m 20.0 W/m2
(S-band, 30 kW)
SN36AF (12') Nil 0.5 m 16.0 W/m2
FR-2865SW SN30AF (10') Nil 1.2 m 46.0 W/m2
(S-band, 60kW)
SN36AF (12') Nil 1.0 m 40.0 W/m2
*UK DRA measured on FR-2815/2825 with NARDA 8616. Other values by FURUNO.

i
 WARNING WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Do not place liquid-filled containers on
Do not open the equipment. the top of the equipment.

Only qualified personnel Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid

should work inside the spills into the equipment.
equipment.
Do not operate the equipment with wet
Turn off the radar power hands.
switch before servicing the
scanner unit. Post a warn- Electrical shock can result.
ing sign near the switch
indicating it should not be Keep heater away from equipment.
turned on while the scanner
unit is being serviced. Heat can alter equipment shape and melt
the power cord, which can cause fire or
Prevent the potential risk of electrical shock.
being struck by the rotating
scanner and exposure to
RF radiation hazard.

Wear a safety belt and hard

hat when working on the
scanner unit. CAUTION
Serious injury or death can Do not use the equipment for other than
result if someone falls from its intended purpose.
the radar scanner mast.
Use of the equipment as a stepping stool,
Do not disassemble or modify the for example, can result in personal injury
equipment. or equipment damage.

Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can No one navigation device should ever be
result. solely replied upon for the navigation of
a vessel.
Turn off the power immediately if water
leaks into the equipment or the equip- Always confirm position against all available
ment is emitting smoke or fire. aids to navigation, for safety of vessel and
crew.
Continued use of the equipment can cause
fire or electrical shock.

ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION
A Word to the Owner of FURUNO Radar ................................................................................ v
About This Manual .................................................................................................................. vi
Features................................................................................................................................... vii
Specifications........................................................................................................................... ix
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................... xii

1. OPERATION
1.1 Turning on the Power ...................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Transmitter ON ............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.3 Controls ........................................................................................................................1-2
1.4 CRT Brilliance ..............................................................................................................1-6
1.5 Tuning the Receiver ...................................................................................................... 1-6
1.6 On-screen Legends and Markers .................................................................................. 1-7
1.7 Degaussing the CRT Screen ......................................................................................... 1-8
1.8 Initializing the Gyro Readout .......................................................................................1-9
1.9 Presentation Modes .......................................................................................................1-9
1.10 Selecting the Range Scale...........................................................................................1-12
1.11 Selecting the Pulsewidth .............................................................................................1-12
1.12 Adjusting the Sensitivity ............................................................................................1-14
1.13 Suppressing Sea Clutter ..............................................................................................1-14
1.14 Suppressing Precipitation Clutter ...............................................................................1-15
1.15 Interference Rejector ..................................................................................................1-15
1.16 Measuring the Range ..................................................................................................1-16
1.17 Measuring the Bearing................................................................................................1-16
1.18 Collision Assessment by Offset EBL .........................................................................1-17
1.19 Measuring Range and Bearing Between Two Targets ................................................1-18
1.20 Setting a Guard Zone (Guard Alarm) .........................................................................1-18
1.21 Off-Centering ..............................................................................................................1-19
1.22 Echo Stretch ................................................................................................................1-20
1.23 Echo Averaging...........................................................................................................1-21
1.24 Electronic Plotting Aid (EPA) ....................................................................................1-22
1.25 Target Trails (Echo Trails) ..........................................................................................1-24
1.26 Parallel Index Lines ....................................................................................................1-26
1.27 Anchor Watch .............................................................................................................1-28
1.28 Origin Mark ................................................................................................................1-29
1.29 Zoom...........................................................................................................................1-30
1.30 Markers .......................................................................................................................1-30
1.31 Menu Keys ..................................................................................................................1-31
1.32 RADAR 1 and 2 Menu Settings .................................................................................1-32
1.33 Function Keys .............................................................................................................1-33
1.34 EPA Menu ...................................................................................................................1-39
1.35 NAV INFORMATION Menu and Navigation Data Display ......................................1-40
1.36 Radar Map ..................................................................................................................1-42
1.37 Suppressing Second-trace Echoes ..............................................................................1-43
1.38 Adjusting Relative Brilliance Levels of Screen Data .................................................1-44

iii
1.39 Set and Drift (Set and Rate) ........................................................................................1-44
1.40 Display of Ancillary Information ...............................................................................1-45
1.41 Alarms ........................................................................................................................1-46

2. OPERATION OF ARPA
2.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Keys Used for ARPA ....................................................................................................2-1
2.3 ARPA Menu Operation ................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4 Start-up Procedure ........................................................................................................2-3
2.5 Automatic Acquisition .................................................................................................. 2-4
2.6 Manual Acquisition.......................................................................................................2-7
2.7 Changing Plot Symbol Size .......................................................................................... 2-7
2.8 Adjusting Brilliance of Plot Marks .............................................................................2-10
2.9 Displaying Target Data ...............................................................................................2-10
2.10 Mode and Length of Vectors....................................................................................... 2-11
2.11 Past Position Display .................................................................................................. 2-11
2.12 Setting CPA/TCPA Alarm Ranges ..............................................................................2-12
2.13 Setting a Guard Zone ..................................................................................................2-13
2.14 Operational Warnings .................................................................................................2-14
2.15 Trial Maneuver ...........................................................................................................2-15
2.16 ARPA Track Test ........................................................................................................2-17
2.17 Criteria for Selecting Targets for Tracking .................................................................2-18
2.18 Factors Affecting ARPA Functions .............................................................................2-19

3. RADAR OBSERVATION
3.1 General ......................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 False Echoes ................................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder) ..................................................................... 3-3
3.4 RACON (Radar Beacon) .............................................................................................. 3-5

4. MAINTENANCE
4.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule ....................................................................................4-1
4.2 Life Expectancy of Major Parts ....................................................................................4-2

5. TROUBLESHOOTING
5.1 Easy Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Advanced-level Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 5-2
5.3 Diagnostic Test ............................................................................................................. 5-5

APPENDIX
A.1 Performance Monitor ...................................................................................................A-1
A.2 For Fishing Vessel .......................................................................................................A-2
A.3 Navigation Data (IEC 61162-1 Edition 1 and Edition 2) ............................................ A-3
A.4 Sentence Description ...................................................................................................A-7
MENU TREE ............................................................................... MN-1
Declaration of conformity to type
Declaration of Conformity (FR/FAR-2855, FR/FAR-2855W, FR/FAR-2865SW)

iv
INTRODUCTION

A Word to the Owner of FURUNO Radar

Thank you for purchasing this FURUNO radar and/or ARPA. We are confident you will dis-
cover why FURUNO has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
Dedicated in the design and manufacture of marine electronics equipment for 50 years,
FURUNO Electric Company has gained an unrivaled reputation as a world leader in the in-
dustry. This is the result of our technical excellence as well as our worldwide distribution and
service network.
Please carefully read and follow the safety information and operating and maintenance in-
structions set forth in this manual before attempting to operate the equipment and conduct
any maintenance. Your radar set will perform to the utmost of its ability only if it is operated
and maintained in accordance with the correct procedures.

FR-2805 Series
The FR-2805 Series are available in the following two types:

Regular type and IMO type

The Regular type is for fishing boats and pleasure boats where some more functions are
provided in addition to the functions of IMO type.
Note: You can easily recognize which type your radar/ARPA is by looking at the range scale
provided.
The FURUNO FR-2805 Series of radars are designed to meet the exacting requirements of
international and national standards and regulations including:
–IMO MSC-64 (67) Annex 4: Performance Standards for Radar Equipment
–IMO A.477 (XII): Performance Standards for Radar Equipment
–A. 694 (17): General requirements for shipborne radio equipment forming part of the
global
maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS) and for electronic navigation aids
–IEC 60936-1: Shipborne Radar Operational and Performance Requirements
–IEC 60936-2: Radar for HSC
–IEC 60945: Marine Navigational Equipment General Requirements

FAR-2805 Series ARPA

There are also Regular type and IMO type as in the FR-2805-I series radars. The IMO type
ARPA complies with the following (Regular type also complies with but includes more addi-
tional functions convenient for practical uses in fishing):
–IMO Resolution A.823 (19): Performance standards for Automatic Radar Plotting Aids
–A. 694 (17): General requirements for shipborne radio equipment forming part of the
global maritime distress and safety system (GMDSS) and for electronic navigation aids
–Results of NAV 40/WP.3/Add. l which is to be met for new building on or after January 1,
1997
–IEC 60945:1996-11: Marine Navigational Equipment General Requirements
–Us Navigation safety regulations, Labeling requirement in § 164.38(d)(1) of CFR33

v
"This device was designed and manufactured to comply with the International Mari-
time Organization (IMO) Performance Standards for Automatic Radar Plotting Aids
(ARPA)."

WARNING

If your ship is 10,000 or more gross tons and scheduled to operate in the navigable waters of
the United States, make sure the above label is attached on the ARPA. Otherwise please
make one yourself by typing and gluing overleaf with the transparent seal.
Precautions on high speed craft

Assume your ship is making 40 kt and a target ship is approaching at 40 kt right toward
you. Then the relative speed is 80 kt. With the antenna revolving at 42 rpm, the target blip
appears jumping to a new location 59 m nearer. This jump corresponds to 23 mm on the
360 mm display using the 0.25 nm range scale. On such a short range you may lose the
track of target in the midst of sea clutter, random noise or other targets. Use one step larger
range scale.

ARPA can fail to track a target when the relative speed exceeds 100 kt.

About This Manual

This manual is designed to provide information on operation and maintenance of the FR-2805
series radars as well as fault diagnosis and troubleshooting procedures which may be per-
formed by suitably qualified personnel on board.
In producing this manual, we tried to provide as "user friendly" an operation guide as possible
to the many functions of this sophisticated equipment. We would appreciated feedback from
you about this manual. Your comments and suggestions would be valuable inputs for future
improvement.

Categorization by specification
See the table on the next page.

vi
 Item IMO-type R-type
Range Scales 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, FR-2805 and FAR-2805
3, 6, 12, 16, 24, 48, 96 nm 0.125, 0.25. 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6,
12, 24, 48, 72nm

Other models:
0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6,
12, 16, 24, 32, 48, (72) 120 nm
Guard Zone IRange depth fixed to 0.5 Inward (CZ) or outward (Anchor)
nm with both outer and guard alarm selectable.
inner limits settable
between 3 and 6 nm. Outer and inner limits can be set
at any distance from own ship.

ARPA guard ring:

Outer limit: 0.7-32 nm
Width of ring: 0.5 nm
Sector angle: 1-360°
Off-centering Up to 75% of range in use Up to 100% of range in use in
in any direction any direction
Anchor Watch Available in stand-by only Available in either stand-by or
transmit status
Own Ship Mark Standard mark Displayed when Anchor Watch is
activated. (Entry of ship data
required.)
x2 Zoom No Yes
Stern Marker No Yes

Features
The new FR-2805 series of radar and the FAR-2805 series of ARPAs are the results of com-
bination of the FURUNO's many years of experience in the marine field and the advanced
computer technology. The FR-2805 series and FAR-2805 series are designed to fully meet
the exacting rules of the International Maritime Organization (IMO) for installations on all classes
of vessels.
The display unit employs a 28" diagonal high-resolution green-phosphor CRT. It provides an
effective radar picture of 360 mm diameter leaving sufficient space for on-screen alphanu-
meric data.
Target detection is enhanced by the sophisticated signal processing technique such as multi-
level quantization (MLQ), echo stretch, echo average, and a built-in radar interference rejec-
tor. Audible and visual guard zone alarms are provided as standard. Other ship's movement is
assessed by trails of target echoes or by electronic plotting. The FAR-2805 series ARPA fur-
ther provides target assessment by historical plots, vectors and target data table.
On-screen data readouts include CPA, TCPA, range, bearing, speed/course of own ship and
up to 3 targets. The ARPA functions include automatic acquisition of up to 20 targets, or
manual acquisition of 40 targets. In addition, the ARPA features display of a traffic lane, buoys,
dangerous points, and other important reference points.

vii
General features

Daylight-bright high-resolution display

28" diagonal CRT presents radar picture of 360 mm effective diameter with alphanumeric
data area around it

User friendly operation by combination of tactile backlit touchpads, a trackball and rotary
controls

Audio-visual alert for targets in guard zone

Echo trail to assess targets' speed and course by simulated afterglow

Electronic plotting of up to 10 targets in different symbols (This function is disabled when
ARPA is activated.)

Electronic parallel index lines

Interswitch (optional) built in radar or ARPA display unit

Enhanced visual target detection by Echo Average, Echo Stretch, Interference Rejector,
and multi-level quantization

Stylish display

Choice of 10, 25 or 50 kW output for X-band; 30 kW output for S-band, either in the trans-
ceiver aloft (gearbox) or RF down (transceiver in bridge)

Exclusive FURUNO MIC low noise receiver

ARPA features

Acquires up to 20 targets automatically plus up to 20 targets manually, or all 40 targets
manually

Movement of tracked targets shown by true or relative vectors. (Vector length 1 to 99 min.
selected in 1 min. steps.)

Setting of nav lines, buoy marks and other symbols to enhance navigation safety

On-screen digital readouts of range, bearing, course, speed, CPA (Closest Point of Ap-
proach), TCPA (Time to CPA), BCR (Bow Crossing Range) and BCT (Bow Crossing Time)
of 2 targets out of all tracked targets.

Audible and visual alarms against threatening targets coming into operator-selected CPA/
TCPA limits, lost targets, targets, two guard rings, visual alarm against system failure and
target full situation

viii
 FR/FAR-2825W, 2855, 2855W, 2835S,
Specifications 2835SW, 2865SW:
Range (nm) Pulselength (µs) PRR (Hz)
ANTENNA RADIATORS 0.125, 0.25, 0.5 0.08 2200
0.75, 1.5 0.08/0.3* 2200
1. Type 3 Two from 0.08, 0.3*, 0.6 2200/1100
6 Two from 0.08, 0.3*, 0.6 2200/1100
Slotted waveguide array 12, 24 0.6, 1.2 1000/600
48, 96 1.2 600/500
2. Beamwidth and sidelobe attenuation *: In case of FR-2855, FR-2855W, FR-2865SW
Band X-band S-band 0.3 is replaced with 0.2.0
Radiator XN20AF XN24AF
type XN12AF XN3
(XN3A) (XN4A)
XN5A SN36AF SN30AF 4. I.F.
Beamwidth
1.8° 1.23° 1.23° 0.95° 0.75° 2.1° 2.5° 60 MHz, Logarithmic
(Hor.)
Beamwidth S1-M1: 28 MHz
20° 25° 20° 20° 20° 25° 25°
(Ver.) M2-Lpulse: 3 MHz
Sidelobe att
28 dB 24 dB 28 dB 28 db 26 db 25 dB 24 db
within ±10°
Sidelobe att
5. Duplexer
32 dB 32 dB 30 db 30 dB 30 db
outside ±10° 32 dB 30 dB Ferrite circulator with diode limiter for
* 10 ft radiator SN30AF available for NON-SOLAS ship. (FAR-2835S HSC is
available for SOLAS ship.) FR/FAR-2815/2825/2835S/2835sw
Ferrite circulator with TR limiter for FR-
3. Polarization 2825W/2855/2855W/2865SW
Horizontal 6. Noise figure
4. Rotation FR/FAR-2815/2825/2825W/2855/2855W/
FR/FAR-2815/2825: 24/42 rpm 2835S: 6 dB
FR/FAR-2825W2855W, FR/FAR-2835SW: 4 dB
FR/FAR-2835SW/2865SW: 21 rpm (50 Hz), FR/FAR-2865SW: 4.5 dB
26 rpm (60 Hz)
FR/FAR-2835S: 21 rpm (50 Hz), RADAR DISPLAY
26 rpm (60 Hz),
45 rpm (for HSC) 1. Picture tube
FR/FAR-2855: 16 rpm (50 Hz), 28" color CRT, Effective radar diameter 360
20 rpm (60 Hz or DC) mm
IMO type: Yellow or green echoes in 16 levels
RF TRANSCEIVER R-type: Yellow or green echoes in 16 levels or
3 colors depending on echo strengths
1. Frequency Different color for VRM, range rings, alarms,
X-band: 9410 MHz ±30 MHz etc.
9415 MHz ±30 MHz(50kW) Raster scan at 32.25 kHz horizontal, 60 Hz
S-band: 3050 MHz ±30 MHz vertical. Number of scanning lines 1024,
interlaced.
2. Output power
2. Minimum range and discription
FR/FAR-2815: 12 kW
FR/FAR-2825/2825W: 25 kW 35 m
FR/FAR-2855-I/2855W: 50 kW 3. Range scales (nm)
FR/FAR-2835S-I/2835SW: 30 kW
FR/FAR-2865SW: 60 kW IMO type:
0.125 (.025), 0.25 (0.05), 0.5 (0.1), 0.75
3. Pulselength/PRF (0.25), 1.5 (0.25), 3 (0.5), 6 (1), 12 (2), 24 (4),
FR/FAR-2815/2825 48 (8), 96 (16)
Range(nm) Pulselength (µs) PRR (Hz) R-type:
0.125, 0.25 0.07 2200 0.125 (.025), 0.25 (0.05), 0.5 (0.1), 0.75
0.5, 0.75 0.07/0.15 2200 (0.25), 1.5 (0.25), 3 (0.5), 6 (1), 12 (2), 16 (4),
1.5 Two from 0.07, 0.15, 0.3 2200/1000 24 (4), 32 (8), 48 (8), 72 (16), 120 (20)
3 Two from 0.15, 0.3, 0.5 2200/1000
6 Two from 0.3, 0.5, 1.2 1000/600 4. Range accuracy
12, 24 Two from 0.5, 1.2 1000/600 1% of range in use or 15 m whichever is the
48, 96 1.2 600 (48 greater
nm)/500
(96 nm)

ix
5. Bearing accuracy 5. Collision warning
±1° CPA limit: 0.2 to 10 nm
TCPA limit: 0 to 99 min
6. Bearing discrimination
Better than 2.5° except S-band 10 ft radiators 6. Guard zone (Guard ring)
(SN-30AF) 2 guard zones (guard rings) of operator-
defined width in 0.7 to 32 nm, Sector 1 to
7. Presentation modes 360° any direction
Head-up, Head-up TB, North-up, Course-up,
True motion north-up 7. Trial maneuver
(Automatically set to HU in case of compass Simulates the effect on all tracked targets of
failure) own ship maneuver with course, speed and
delay time.
8. Variable Range Markers
Two Variable Range Markers, switched
INTERFACING
9. Electronic Bearing Lines
Two Electronic Bearing Lines, switched 1. IEC 61162-1
Range merker on EBL OSD, RSD, TTM, etc. (Listener 2 mA at 2V,
Talker 60 mA max)
10. Offcenter
IMO type: Sweep origin can be offcentered 2. Analog
by 75% of range in use in any direction. RGB video, H/V sync for VDR with optional
Regular type: Any direction up to 100% board)
11. Target alarm zone 3.Gyrocompass
2 TAZ at 3 and 6 nm in width of 0.5 nm, any Built-in interface accepts synchro signal (20-
sector. 50 V, 50-400 Hz) or stepper signal (20-50
VDC, any polarity).
12. Electronic plotting (E-plot)
10 targets manual plotting. Not operative in 4. Speed log (IEC 61192-1 interface)
ARPA mode. IEC 61192-1 contact closure or 200/400/500
pulses/nm.
13. Parallel index lines
2, 3 and 6 lines (selectable on menu)
14. Navigation lines (option) POWER SUPPLY
Two lines to define a navigation channel 1. FR/FAR-2815/2825
(with RP-25)
115/230 VAC, 1ø, 470 VA(2815), 500
VA(2825), DC set not available
ARPA FUNCTIONS
2. FR/FAR-2825W/2855/2855W
1. Acquisition Display unit: 115/230 VAC, 1ø, 500 VA
Instant selection of auto or manual acquisition (2825W), 115 VAC, 1ø, 550 VA (2855/
in 0.2 to 32 nm, relative speed 100 kt. Auto 2855W)
20 targets plus manual 20 targets, or Manual Antenna unit: 115/230 VAC, 1ø, 150 VA
40 targets (2825W/2855W), 230 VAC, 3ø, 120 VA, 380/
440 VAC, 3ø, 120 VA (2825W/2855W), 24 V,
2. Tracking 30 W (2855)
Automatic tracking of all acquired targets on
the display for 5 out of 10 consecutive scans 3. FR/FAR-2835S/2835SW
in 0.1 to 32 nm Display unit: 115/230 VAC, 1ø, 500 W
Antenna unit: 220 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 3ø,
3. Prediction of target motion 440 VA, 380/440 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 3ø, 440 VA
True or relative vectors, time scaled.
Length: 1 to 99 min 4. FR/FAR-2865SW
Display unit: 115 VAC, 1ø, 550 VA
4. Past positions Antenna unit: 220 VAC, 3ø, 50-60 Hz, 440
5 or 10 past positions of tracked targets at VA, 380/440 VAC, 3ø, 50-60 Hz, 440 VA
intervals of 2 min

x
PROGRAM NUMBER Category of Equipment Units
Equipment for Protected Area
SPU Board •Display unit
MAIN: 0359096132 •Power supply unit
SUB: 0359057134 •RF transceiver unit
•Interswitch unit
ARP Board
ARP: 1859038106 Equipment for Exposed
SUB: 18590399101 •Antenna unit
•Performance monitor
RP Board
0359094111 Compass safe distance
See each corresponded Installation Manual.
EQUIPMENT LIST
Standard Supplies
1. Display unit
Radar: RDP-115 (w/RP-25)
ARPA: RDP-115A (w/ARP-25, RP-25)
2. Antenna unit with 30 m antenna cable
3. RF transceiver unit for RF-down system
4. PSU-004 for FR/FAR-2825W/2855W/
2835S/2835SW/2865SW
5. PSU-001 for FR/FAR-2855
6. Standard spare parts and installation
materials

Optional Supplies
1. Waveguide for RF-down system
(Coax cable for S-band)
2. Gyro interface GC-8
3. Interswitch box RJ-7 or 8
4. Performance monitor PM-30* (X-band),
PM-50* (S-band)
5. 42 rpm scanner motor
(FR/FAR-2815/2825 only)
6. 45 rpm scanner motor for HSC
(FAR-2835S only)
7. Video plotter RP-25**
8. ARPA Board ARP-25
9. Hand grip
10. Display pedestal
11. Interface unit IF-2300*

* Necessary in IMO-type Radar and ARPA

** RP-25 (Radar Video Picture) necessary for
all class of SOLAS ships for radar maps and
navlines
*** ARP-25 (Auto Radar Plotter) may not be
necessary on ships below 1,000 GT. Check
with the Administrations.

xi
 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
FR/FAR-2855/2835S
ANTENNA UNIT FR/FAR-2825W/2855W/ FR/FAR-2815/2825
The antenna unit contains the RF 2835SW/2865SW The antenna unit contaains the RF
transceiver in its scanna housing. transceiver in its scanner housing.

See the list below tor

I co I Waveguide
WRJ-9 for X-band \
_
scanner units. TRANSCEIVER module
in :
I WRJ-3 for S-band -
RTR 062* (FR/FAR-2815)

RW-4873 (for 2815/2825)

CO
co
S!
' i or Coax cable -
RTR 063* (FR/FAR 2825) -
in
m RTR-030 (FR/FAR-2855)
I TRANSCEIVER UNIT
I CO
CM RTR-066 (FR/FAR-2835S)
RTR -010 (For FR/FAR-2855W)
O
I RTR-046 (For FR/FAR-2825W)

RW-6895
LO
05 RTR -018 (For FR/FAR -2865SW) Performance
Power Supply 8 I RTR-047 (For FR/FAR -2835SW) Monitor (option)
Unit PSU-001 $
DC
PM-30 for X-band
(For FR/FAR-2855) RW-6895 for FR/FAR-2825W/2835SW PM-50 for S-band
T I RW-5093 for FR/FAR- 2855 W/2865SW

CO- SPEVV- SB-C

I DISPLAY UNIT
RDP-115 (Radar) Gyro
Power Supply I
— Gyro
—
RDP- 115A (RADAR/ ARPA) Converter
Unit PSU-004 r ••• •-
I I in
m
I Gyro Interface I
GC -8 :
- 250V-MPYCY-5
115/230 VAC,
co I
ll. I

——
CM *10, 50/60 Hz
3* DC Power Supply 250V-DPYCY- 1.25
c.
CO
<
.
U Unit PSU-004 CO-SPEVV-SB-C
Radar system data
© I I £ Video Plotter and target data in
c I 1 IEC61162 chart data, etc.
CO
ss
•tS
c o= RP-25 needed for NAV data (GLL ..)
o
-
Li
C
3
3
re re Radar Map ! 2C 1.5 m Interface Speed (VBW, VHW)
c .
re c Q
IF-2300 TRUE Heading (HDT)
Q. 2 .52
.TJ
S2 c
re
o _ o:
o
u. *r - Interswitch
RJ-7.8
Other Radar system
I u u-1
I i I 115/230 VAC, 1φ, 50/60 Hz
External Buzzer
Display unit (Ant and disp for FR/FAR2815/2825)
115/230 VAC, 10, 50/60 Hz
115 VAC, 10 50/60 Hz (FR/FAR-2855)
I
Antenna unit Optional Supply
; Display unit
See the table in below. Power
! 115/230 VAC, 10, 50/60 Hz
I 115 VAC, 10, 50/60 Hz (FR/FAR-2855W/2865SW) Please specify power supply
when ordering.
• Antenna unit Optional transformer is
See the table in below. required for other mains

xii
ANTENNA UNIT (Turning unit or Gearbox)

Model Antenna unit Motor type

RSB-0074 (24 rpm, 24 VDC)* D8G-516
FR/FAR-2815
RSB-0075 (42 rpm, 24 VDC)* D8G-571
RSB-0074 (24 rpm, 24 VDC)* D8G-516
FR/FAR-2825
RSB-0075 (42 rpm, 24 VDC)* D8G-571
RSB-0049 (16 rpm (50 Hz)/20 rpm (60 Hz),
GOB-8222
FR/FAR-2855 200/220 VAC, 3φ)
RSB-0050 (20 rpm, 24 VDC) RM-6585
RSB-0076 (21 rpm (50 Hz)/26 rpm (60 Hz),
RM-8123
200/220 VAC, 3φ) *
FR/FAR-2825W RSB-0077 (21 rpm (50 Hz)26 rpm (60 Hz),
RM-8124
FR/FAR-2855W 380/440 VAC, 3φ) *
RSB-0078 (21 rpm (50 Hz)26 rpm (60 Hz),
RM-8247
380/440 VAC, 1φ) *
RSB-0026 (21 rpm (50 Hz)26 rpm (60 Hz),
RM-7398
200/220 VAC, 3φ)
RSB-0031 (21 rpm (50 Hz)26 rpm (60 Hz),
RM-7435
200/220 VAC, 3φ)
RSB-0088 (45 rpm, 220 VAC, 3φ, 50 Hz) for
FR/FAR-2835S RM-9519
HSC S-band
RSB-0089 (45 rpm, 220 VAC, 3φ, 60 Hz)
RM-9520
HSC S-band
RSB-0090 (45 rpm, 440 VAC, 3φ, 60 Hz)
RM-9521
HSC S-band
RSB-0027 (21 rpm (50 Hz)26 rpm (60 Hz),
RM-7398
200/220 VAC, 3φ)
FR/FAR-2835SW
RSB-0032 (21 rpm (50 Hz)26 rpm (60 Hz),
RM-7435
380/440 VAC, 3φ)

NOTE: The gearboxes marked * work with new radiators (such as XN12AF *). The new radiator
has different physical dimensions at the rotary joint and only fits on the new gear box. The slotted
waveguide array radiators are the same as the current ones. The gearing and motors are the
same as those in the former counterpart. Assembled antenna are compatible to each other within
the same for RF output.

RADIATOR

4 ft Type XN-12AF* 8 ft Type XN-4A, 24AF*

X-Band
6.5 ft Type XN-3, 3A, 20AF* 10 ft Type XN-5A

12 ft SN-36AF 10 ft SN-30AF S-Band

NOTE: Radiators marked * for RSB-0074/0075/0076/0077/0078

xiii
 1. OPERATION
1.2 Transmitter ON
WARNING
When the STANDBY status is displayed
Before turning on the radar, make sure that
on the screen, press the Transmit switch
there is no one near the antenna unit.
Serious injury or even death may result if
labeled ST-BY/TX on the control panel of
a rotating antenna strikes someone the display unit.
standing nearby. The radar is initially set to previously used
range and pulsewidth. Other settings such
as brilliance levels, VRMs, EBLs and
menu option selections are also set to
1.1 Turning on the Power previous settings.
The POWER switch is located at the lower The Transmit switch toggles the radar be-
right corner of the display. Push it to switch tween STANDBY and TRANSMIT status.
on the radar set. To turn off the radar, push The antenna stops in STANDBY status
it again; the switch will extend. The screen and rotates in TRANSMIT status.
shows the bearing scale and digital timer
approximately 15 seconds after power-on. Notes:
The timer counts down three minutes of 1) If the antenna does not rotate in
warm-up time. During this period the mag- TRANSMIT status, check whether the
netron, or the transmitter tube, is warmed antenna switch in the tuning compart-
for transmission. When the timer has ment is in the OFF position.
reached 0:00, the legend STBY appears
indicating that the radar is now ready to 2) The magnetron ages with time result-
transmit pulses. ing in a reduction of output power. It is
highly recommended that the radar be
set to STANDBY status when not used
for an extended period of time.

POWER
ON
OFF
Quick Start
a Provided that the radar was once in use with the
transmitter tube (magnetron) still warm, you can
turn the radar into TRANSMIT condition without
Power 3-minutes standby. If the Power Switch has been
switch turned off by mistake or the like and you wish to
restart the radar promptly, follow the steps
below:
Location of power switch
• Turn on the Power Switch not later than 5 sec
In warm-up and standby condition, you after power-off.
will see the message BRG SIG MISSING. • Press the ST-BY switch in the tuning
This is normal because a bearing signal compartment.
• Press the Transmit Switch STBY/TX.
is not yet generated when the antenna is
not rotating. ON TIME and TX TIME val- o Antenna switch
aaaaaaa aao
^
oooo^ aa aaa
ues shown at the bottom of the screen aaa aaauaaa
ORIGIN VECTOR
TRUE/ VECTOR

are the time counts in hours and tenths aaa aaanoaa

MARK REL
TIME

O ana
of hour when the radar has been pow-
ered on and transmitted.
ST-BY switch

1-1
 ntrols
Co
1.3

w
vervie
Unit O
ay
r Displ
a
es Rad
i
05 Ser
28
FR-

1-2
Main control panel
A/C RAIN control
Reduces clutter from
rain, snow and clouds.
BRILLIANCE control
Adjusts brightness of A/C SEA control
entire screen. Reduces sea clutter.
I
OFF ON OFF ON

EBL BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN VRM

ACQ

A/C ST-BY
AUTO FUNC1 FUNC2 FUNC3 FUNC4
TX

RANGE AUDIO
OFF
i i

FUNCTION keys
A/C AUTO key #1 key: Setup 1 Trackball
GAIN control
Reduces sea #2 key: Setup 2 Shifts cursor
Adjusts receiver
clutter at pre- #3 key: Setup 3 on radar
sensitivity.
set level. Per- #4 key: Setup 4 screen.
mits manual TRANSMIT switch
override by ACQ key
A/C SEA and Press key after
A/C RAIN selecting target by
controls. RANGE keys trackball. The target
Selects range will be acquired in
scales. 30 sec.

EBL ON/OFF control AUDIO OFF key

Pressing ON key toggles Silences aural alarm
between No.1 EBL and (except guard alarm)
No.2 EBL. Bearing is and ARP-23 (option)
read either Relative or generated alarm.
True at the lower left
corner of the screen. VRM ON/OFF keys and rotary control
Press ON to activate VRM. Turn
rotary control clockwise to increase
VRM diameter; counterclockwise to
decrease it. Read range at lower-right
hand corner of screen. There are two
VRMs which are toggled by each press
of ON key. Press OFF key to deactivate
each VRM.

GAIN, A/C RAIN, A/C SEA and BRILL controls are of push-and-rotate type. Push in
wanted switch lightly, and it will pop up. Rotate it to the wanted setting and push it in.
The retracted position of the controls provides a better protection for water splash.

1-3
Display controls

Mode Panel

HM ECHO
MODE
OFF TRAILS

GUARD
ORIGIN VECTOR
EBL VECTOR
OFF
TRUE/
ALARM
MARK OFFSET
REL CENTER
TIME

X2 BKGR INDEX
ZOOM COLOR LINES

CU, TM INT
RINGS
RESET REJECT

HM OFF X2 ZOOM
Temporarily erases the heading marker. Enlarges a user-selected portion of pic-
ture twice as large as normal. (R-type
ECHO TRAILS only)
Shows trails of target echoes in the form
of simulated afterglow. CU, TM RESET
Resets the heading marker to 000° in
MODE course-up mode; moves own ship posi-
Selects presentation modes: Head-up, tion to 50% radius in stern direction in the
Head-up/TB, North-up, Course-up and true motion mode.
True Motion.
INT REJECT
GUARD ALARM Reduces mutual radar interference.
Used for setting the guard alarm.
RINGS
EBL OFFSET Adjusts the brightness of range rings.
Activates and deactivates off-centering of
the sweep origin.
BKGR COLOR
Selects the background color.

INDEX LINES
Alternately shows and erases parallel in-
dex lines.

1-4
Plotting keypad and tuning compartment
Keys for ARPA (FAR)

AUTO TUNE

<
ORIGIN VECTOR VECTOR RADAR
TRUE/

AUTO
MARK REL TIME MENU 1 2 3

GYRO SET
MANU
TARGET
ORIGIN VECTOR
TARGET VECTOR
AUTO
BASED
TRUE/ HOLD
MARK
DATA DATA
REL PLOT
TIME 4 5 6 ON
E,AUTO

ANTENNA
PLOT +
MENU

o
LOST
TRIAL HISTORY –
TARGET 7 8 9 OFF
DEGAUSS ERROR

;;;;;; ;;;;;; ;;;;;;

;;;;;; ;;;;;;
CHART ;;;;;;
VIDEO NAV
;;;;;;
MARK ;;;;;;;;;;;;
CANCEL STBY
ENTER
;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;
;;;;;;;;;;;;
ALIGN PLOT MENU – 9
;;;;;; PM-ON/OFF

Keys for RP-25 (option)

ORIGIN MARK Keys for ARPA (optional in R-type)

Show and erases the origin mark (a ref-
erence point for range/bearing measure- TARGET DATA
ment). Displays the acquired target data.
VECTOR TRUE/REL TARGET BASED DATA
Selects true or relative vector. Own ship's speed is measured relative to
a fixed target.
VECTOR TIME
Sets vector length in time. AUTO PLOT
Activates and deactivates the Auto Plot-
RADAR MENU ter.
Opens and closes RADAR menus.
TRIAL
E-PLOT, AUTO PLOT MENU Initiates a trial maneuver.
Opens and closes E-Plot and optional
AUTO PLOT menus. LOST TARGET
Silences the lost target audible alarm and
NAV MENU erases the lost target symbol.
Opens and closes NAV menu.
HISTORY
Keys 0-9 Shows and erases past positions of
Select plot symbols. Also used for enter- tracked targets.
ing numeric data.
CANCEL Keys for Video Plotter (optional)
Terminates plotting of a specified target MARK Enter/erase marks
or all tracked targets.
CHART ALIGN
ENTER
Used to align chart data.
Used to save settings on menu screen.
VIDEO PLOT
Turns the video plotter on/off.
1-5
1.4 CRT Brilliance 2. Push the tune control so that it pops
up.
Operate the BRILL control on the control 3. While observing the picture on the 48
panel of the display unit to adjust the en- mile scale, slowly adjust TUNE control
tire screen brightness. Note that the opti- and find the best tuning point.
mum point of adjustment varies with
ambient light conditions, especially be- 4. So the TUNE selector to AUTO and
tween daytime and nighttime. wait for about 10 seconds or four scan-
ner rotations.
Brilliance
control 5. Make sure that the radar has been set
t to the best tuning point. This condition
is where the tuning indicator lights to
about 80% of its total length.
BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN
6. Push the TUNE control into the re-
tracted position.
Note: The CRT brilliance should be ad-
justed before adjusting relative brilliance
levels on the BRILLIANCE menu to be Video Lockup Recovery
explained later.
Video lockup, or picture freeze, can occur unex-
pectedly on digital rasterscan radars. This is
mainly caused by heavy spike noise in the power
line and can be noticed by carefully watching the
1.5 Tuning the Receiver nearly invisible sweep line. If you suspect that the
picture is not updated every scan of the antenna
Auto tune or no key entry is accepted notwithstanding the
apparently normal picture, do Quick Start to
The radar receiver is tuned automatically restore normal operation:
each time the power is turned on, thus
there is no front panel control for tuning 1. Turn of the power switch and turn it on again
purpose. The tuning indicator and the la- within five seconds.
bel AUTO TUNE at the top right corner of 2. Push the ST-BY switch in the tuning compart-
ment.
the display unit show the tuning circuit is 3. Push the Transmit switch labeled ST-BY/TX
working. If the label AUTO TUNE is not for Transmit status.
displayed, check that the TUNE selector
in tuning compartment is in the AUTO
position. This LED lights if video lockup is associated
with fundamental malfunction of CPU.
aaaaaaa aao
^ o
oooo^ aa aaa
Manual tune o
aaa
aaa
w aaaaaaa aaa
aaauaaa
aaanaaa
#

If you are not satisfied with the current

i
auto tune setting, follow these steps to ST-BY switch for
fine-tune the receiver: quick start

1. Set the TUNE selector in the tuning

compartment to MAN for manual tun-
ing.
TUNE control
TUNE selector E
O o
AOOOOADD I
nan oooL-looa
ORIGIN
MARK
VECTOR
TRUE/
REL
VECTOR
TIME

coo O

1-6
1.6 On-screen Legends and Markers

Heading
mark
Guard zone
Range and bearing of
cursor from own ship Heading Antenna/Radar in use
line
Range ring Tuning indicator
interval/Range
Alarm clock
GYRO 132.7°
6/1 NM AUTO TUNE LOG 2.2KT
350 000 010 ANT 1 MAIN
1.5 NM 340 020 ARPA
330.0°T 330 030 REL VECTOR 6MIN
Target data
Presentation HEAD UP WATCH
mode RM
320 040 11:30
RNG 4.91NM display
1997 1 BRG
PULSE 1
310 050 02/08 226.1°T (See next
TRU CSE 263.3°T
Pulselength IR3
13:28*
TRU SPD page.)
300 060 12.4KT
Interference ES1 CPA 2.9NM TCPA *** MIN
BCR 8.9NM BCT 20MIN
rejector 290 070
RNG 4.91NM
2 BRG 226.1°T
Echo stretch 280 080 TRU CSE 263.3°T
TRU SPD 12.4KT
270 090 CPA 2.9NM TCPA *** MIN
BCR 8.9NM BCT 20MIN
No.1 EBL 260 100 CURRENT *.*KT Fixed
*.*°T range ring
250 110 WIND *.*KT
No.2 EBL *.*°R
240 120
Automatic Target alarm
clutter 230 130
A/C OS ON
AUTO 220 140 TGT ALARM
Noise NOISE TRU TRAIL [GPS]
REJ 210 150 30MIN + Echo trail
rejector OFFCENTER 200
190
160 15:26 GYRO LOG EPSF settings
180 170
AZIMUTH HDG TRIG
Off-center EBL
>287.2°T<
VRM VIDEO LOST TARGET
PI >5.65NM< AUTO MAN TGT FULL
239.6°T 348.6°T 2.35NM GZ COLLOSION SOG Error Message
appears in red.
Parallel Index Line North marker No.1 VRM (upper)
No.2 VRM (lower)
No.1 EBL (upper) No.1 VRM
No.2 EBL (lower)
No.2 VRM

1-7
 Data Display

HDG 132.7° T GYRO When set/drift is manually applied,

LOG 2.2KT SEA
BT appears instead of WT.
ARPA AUTO+MAN (WT: Water Tracking mode
TRUVEC 6MINSEA BT: Bottom Tracking mode)
HISTORY 6MIN
RNG 4.91NM Acquired target No. 1 data:
BRG 226.1°T RNG: Range
1 263.3°T SEA
TRU CSE BRG: Bearing
TRUSPD 12.4KT SEA
CSE: Course
CPA 2.9NM TCPA *** MIN
BCR 8.9NM BCT 20MIN SPD: Speed
CPA: Closest Point of Approach
RNG 4.91NM TCPA: Time to CPA
np BRG 226.1°T
TRII CSE 263.3°T SEA BCR: Bow Cross Range
TRU
SPD 12.4KT SEA BCT: Bow Cross Time
CPA 2.9NM TCPA *** MIN Acquired target No. 2 data:
BCR 8.9NM BCT 20MIN
Graphic data of water depth below
transducer, current and wind
RNG 4.91NM direction/speed can be displayed at
3 BRG 226.1°T target data No.2 area. The target
TRU CSE 263.3°T SEA data appears with highest priority.
SPD 12.4KT SEA
CPA 2.9NM TCPA ** * MIN Acquired target No. 3 data:
BCR 8.9NM BCT 20MIN Numeric data of the graphic
on target 3 area.

+ 11.7NM
162.5°T
'
Bearing and range from
origin mark (reference mark)
to cursor
WPT 150.8NM Bearing and range to waypoint
72.1°T

OS 34°40.849N Own ship position in latitude and

[GPS]125°18.115E longitude
+ 34°39.039N Cursor position in latitude and
135°18.303E longitude

1.7 Degaussing the CRT degaussed, the screen may be disturbed

momentarily with vertical lines. If you wish
Screen to degauss by manual operation at an
arbitrary time, open and press the "DE-
Each time the radar is turned on, the de-
GAUSS" switch.
gaussing circuit automatically demagne-
tizes the CRT screen to eliminate color Gyro
contamination caused by earth's magne- LED
tism or magnetized ship structure. DEGAUSS switch
o o
uoooouDD
The screen is also degaussed automati-
cally when own ship has made a signifi-
cant course change. While being I
_
(J
ORIGIN
MARK
VECTOR
TRUE/
REL
VECTOR
TIME

‘-ton • - h

Gyro readout
adjustment
switches
1-8
1.8 Initializing the Gyro 1.9 Presentation Modes
Readout
This radar has the following presentation
Provided that your radar is interfaced with modes:
a gyrocompass, ship's heading is dis- Relative Motion (RM)
played at the top of the screen. Upon turn-
ing on the radar, align the on-screen Head-up: Unstabilised
GYRO readout with the gyrocompass Head-up TB:Head-up with compass-
reading by the procedure shown below. stabilized bearing scale
Once you have set the initial heading cor- (True Bearing)
rectly, resetting is not usually required. Course-up: Compass-stabilized rela-
However, if the GYRO readout goes tive to ship's intended
wrong for some reason, repeat the pro- course
cedure to correct it. North-up: Compass-stabilized with
reference to north
1. Open the tuning compartment and
press the HOLD button. The Gyro LED True Motion (TM)
lights. North-up: Ground or sea stabilized
Gyro with compass and speed in-
LED puts
DEGAUSS switch
ana aa oo o o o
o a a aaaaaaa Selecting presentation mode
aaa aaanaaa
ORIGIN VECTOR
TRUE/ VECTOR

••
aaauaaa
REL
MARK TIME

aaa
aaa aaaaaaa (^ J aaaaaaa Press the MODE key on the mode panel.
Gyro readout Each time the MODE key is pressed, the
adjustment presentation mode and mode indication
switches at the upper-left corner of the screen
2. Press the UP or DOWN button to du- change cyclically.
plicate the gyrocompass reading at the
on-screen GYRO readout. Each press HL ECHO
MODE
OFF TRAILS
of these buttons changes the readout
by 0.1-degree steps. To change the
readout quickly, hold the UP or DOWN ORIGIN
GUARD VECTOR
EBL
TRUE/
VECTOR
OFF
ALARM
MARK OFFSET CENTER
TIME
button for over two seconds. REL

3. Press the HOLD switch when the on-

screen GYRO readout has matched Loss of Gyro Signal
the gyrocompass reading. The Gyro When the gyro signal is lost, the presentation
LED goes out. mode automatically becomes head-up and
the GYRO readout at the screen top shows
Note: The HOLD button is used to disen- asterisks (***.*). The message SET HEADING
gage the built-in gyro interface from the appears at the lower-left corner of the screen.
gyrocompass input in the event that you This warning stays on when the gyro signal is
restored, to warn the operator that the readout
have difficulty in fine-adjusting the GYRO may be unreliable. Press the MODE key to
readout due to ship's yawing, for example. select another presentation mode (the asterisks
When initializing the GYRO readout at a are erased at this point). Then, align the GYRO
berth (where the gyrocompass reading is readout with the gyrocompass reading and press
usually stable), you may omit steps 1 and the CANCEL key to erase the message SET
3 above. HEADING.

1-9
 Presentation mode, Description
representative display

Heading Head-up Mode

North 000 010
line
350
340 020
marker 330 030
A display withouth azimuth stabilization in which
320 040
310 050
the line connecting the center with the top of the
300 060
display indicates own ship's heading.
290 070

280 080
The target pips are painted at their measured dis-
270 090
tances and in their directions relative to own ship's
260
heading.
100

250 110
A short line on the bearing scale is the north marker
240 120
indicating compass north. A failure of the gyro
230
220 140
130
input will cause the north marker to disappear and
210
200 160
150 the GYRO readout to show asterisks (***.*) and the
190 180 170
message SET HDG appears on the screen.

Heading
North 000 line Course-up Mode
350 010
340 020
marker 330 030
320 040 An azimuth stabilized display in which a line connect-
310 050
ing the center with the top of the display indicates own
300 060
ship's intended course (namely, own ship's previous
290 070
heading just before this mode has been selected).
280 080
Target pips are painted at their measured distances
270 090 and in their directions relative to the intended course
260 100 which is maintained at the 0-degree position while the
250 110 heading marker moves in accordance with ship's
240 120 yawing and course changes. This mode is useful to
230 130 avoid smearing of picture during course change. After
220
210 150
140 a course change, press the [CU, TM RESET] key to
200
190 180 170
160 reset the picture orientation if you wish to continue
using the course-up mode.

Heading Head-up TB (True Bearing) Mode

North 000 010
line
350
340 020
marker 330 030
Radar echoes are shown in the same way as in the
320 040
310 050 head-up mode. The difference from normal head-up
300 060 presentation lies in the orientation of the bearing
290 070 scale. The bearing scale is compass stabilized, that
280 080 is, it rotates in accordance with the compass signal,
270 090 enabling you to know own ship's heading at a
260 100
glance.
250 110

240 120
This mode is available only when the radar is inter-
230 130
faced with a gyrocompass.
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

The bearing scale rotates with

a compass signal.

1-10
Presentation mode, Description
representative display

Heading North-up Mode

North line
marker 350 000 010
330
340 020
030 In the north-up mode, target pips are painted at their
320 040
measured distances and in their true (compass)
310 050
directions from own ship, north being maintained
300 060
UP of the screen. The heading marker changes its
290 070
direction according to the ship's heading.
280 080

270 090
If the gyrocompass fails, the presentation mode
260 100 changes to head-up and the north maker disappears.
250 110 Also, the GYRO readout shows asterisks (***.*)
240 120 and the messageSET HEADING appears at the
230 130 lower-left corner of the screen.
220 140
210 150
200 160
190 180 170

340
350 000 010
020
True Motion Mode
330 030
320 040
310 050
Own ship and other moving objects move in accord-
300 060
ance with their true courses and speeds. All fixed
290 070
targets, such as landmasses, appear as stationary
280 080
echoes.
270 090
When own ship reaches a point corresponding to 75%
260 100
of the radius of the display, the own ship is auto-
250 110 matically reset to a point of 50% radius opposite to
240 120 the extension of the heading marker passing through
230 130 the display center. Resetting can be made at any
220 140
210 150 moment before the ship reaches the limit by pressing
200
190 180 170
160
the [CU, TM RESET] key. Automatic resetting is
preceded by a beep sound.
If the gyrocompass fails, the presentation mode is
changed to the head-up mode and the north marker
disappears. The GYRO readout at the top of the
screen shows asterisks (***.*) and the message SET
HEADING appears at the lower-left corner of the
screen.

North
maker
Heading 330
340 350 000 010 020
030 330
340 350 000 010 020
030 330
340 350 000 010 020
030

line 320 040 320 040 320 040

310 050 310 050 310 050

300 060 300 060 300 060

290 070 290 070 290 070

280 080 280 080 280 080

270 090 270 090 270 090

260 100 260 100 260 100

250 110 250 110 250 110

240 120 240 120 240 120

230 130 230 130 230 130

220 140 220 140 220 140
210 150 210 150 210 150
200 160 200 160 200 160
190 180 170 190 180 170 190 180 170

(a) True motion (b) Own ship has reached a (c) Own ship is automatically
is selected point 75% of display radius reset to 50% of radius

Automatic resetting of sweep center in true motion mode

1-11
1.10 Selecting the Range Scale Pulsewidth
Legend
The display range scale is changed in 13
steps on the R-type (11 steps on the IMO- X-band S-band
type) by pressing the [+] and [-] keys. The S (Short pulse) – 0.08 µs
selected range scale and range ring in-
terval are shown at the upper left corner S1 (Short pulse 1) 0.07 µs –
on the screen. S2 (Short pulse 2) 0.15 µs –
The display range can be expanded by M1 (Medium pulse 1) 0.3 µs 0.3 µs
75% (100% in R-type) in any direction by M2 (Medium pulse 2) 0.5 µs 0.6 µs
using the off-centering control.
L (Long pulse) 1.2 µs 1.2 µs
For FR/FAR-2855, 2855W and 2565SW,
1.11 Selecting the Pulsewidth 0.3 µs becomes 0.2 µs.

The pulsewidth in use is displayed at the

upper-left position of the screen using the Presetting pulsewidths 1 and 2
abbreviations shown in the table above. Pulsewidth 1 and 2 can be preset on the
Appropriate pulsewidths are preset to in- Pulsewidth 1 and 2 menus. Shown below
dividual range scales and function keys. are examples of the pulsewidth setup pro-
Therefore, you are not usually required cedure:
to select them. If you are not satisfied with 1. To enable selection of S1 (0.07 µs) and
the current pulsewidth settings, however, S2 (0.15 µs) pulsewidth on the 0.5 nm
it is possible to change them by the Ra- range on an X-band model, select S1
dar menu operation shown below. at 0.5 nm on the PULSEWIDTH 1
You can choose the pulsewidth 1 or 2 on menu and S2 at 0.5 nm on the PULSE-
the scales 0.5 to 24 nm ranges on X- WIDTH 2 menu.
band models (0.75 to 24 nm ranges on 2. To enable selection of S2 (0.15 µs) and
S-band models). M1 (0.3 µs) pulsewidth on the 3 nm
range on an X-band model, select S2
at 3 nm in the PULSEWIDTH 1 menu
Selecting pulsewidth 1 or 2 and M1 at 3 nm in the PULSEWIDTH
1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the 2 menu.
plotting keypad to show the FUNC- A longer pulse provides an increased de-
TIONS menu. tection range, but with reduced discrimi-
2. Press the [1] key to select menu item 1 nation. If you need discrimination in
PULSEWIDTH. preference to detection, choose a shorter
pulse.
3. Press the [1] key to select (or highlight)
PULSEWIDTH 1 OR 2 as appropriate. Example: To select S1 (0.07 µs) as
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your Pulsewidth 1 for the 0.5 nm range, dis-
selection followed by the RADAR play the PULSEWIDTH 1 menu following
MENU key to close the FUNCTION the steps shown above and hit the [2] key
menu. to choose "2 0.5 NM." Further hit the [2]
key until the menu option "S1" is high-
lighted to the right of "2 0.5 NM."

Note: For FR-2815/2825, the menus on

the next page are for the R-type. Refer to
paragraph 1.32 or the menus on the IMO
type.
1-12
 [RADAR 1]
1 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
2 EBL1 (R-type only) REL/TRUE Hit [RADAR MENU].
3 EBL2 (R-type only) REL/TRUE
4
5 !I
6 TRAIL REL/TRUE
7 TRAIL GRAD SGL/MULT [FUNCTIONS 1]
8 [PULSEWIDTH 1] (IMO-type only)
9 [PULSEWIDTH 2] (IMO-type only)
0 RADAR2 1 PULSE WIDTH 1/2
2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
4 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/M/BRT
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR*
Hit [9]. Hit [8].
6 SHIP'S SPEED LOG/NAV*/MAN
7 INDEX LINES NO.2 VRM/MAN
I 8 SET/DRIFT OFF/MAN
[PULSE WD 1] SET 000.0
DRIFT 00.0 KT
1 [RADAR 1]
2 0.5 NM S1/S2 -- (Blank on S-band) 9 BRILLIANCE
3 0.75 NM S1/S2 -- (S/M1 on S-band) 0 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
4 1.5 NM S1/S2/M1 -- (S/M1 on S-band)
5 3 NM S2/M1/M2 -- (S/M1/M2 on S-band)
* R-type only
6 6 NM M1/M2/L
7 12-24 NM M2/L
Hit [0].

1
[PULSE WD 2]
[FUNCTIONS 2]

1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
1 [RADAR 1] Hit [2]. 2 RADAR 1
2 0.5 NM S1/S2 -- (Blank on S-band) 3 FUNCTION KEY 1
3 0.75 NM S1/S2 -- (S/M1 on S-band) 4 FUNCTION KEY 2
4 1.5 NM S1/S2/M1 -- (S/M1 on S-band) 5 FUNCTION KEY 3
5 3 NM S2/M1/M2 -- (S/M1/M2 on S-band)
6 FUNCTION KEY 4
6 6 NM M1/M2/L 7 RADAR 2 1/2
7 12-24 NM M2/L 8 ANCHOR WATCH
9
0 [SYSTEM SETTING 2]

1-13
1.12 Adjusting the Sensitivity
The GAIN control is used to adjust the
sensitivity of the receiver, and thus the
intensity of echoes as they appear on the
screen. It should be adjusted so that
speckled background noise is just visible
on the screen. A/C SEA control A/C SEA control
off adjusted
To become acquainted with the way the
GAIN control works, try rotating it between
fully counterclockwise and clockwise po- Automatic anti-clutter control
sitions while observing the radar picture.
You will notice that clockwise rotation in- The easiest way to suppress the surface
creases the echo intensity level. A low clutter is to use the automatic control.
gain setting results in the loss of weak Press the A/C AUTO key next to the EBL
echoes and a reduced detection range. If rotary control at the left corner on the con-
you turn the GAIN control too far clock- trol panel. Use of a function key is also a
wise for an excessive gain setting, desired good method for reducing sea clutter. For
echoes will be masked in the strong back- this purpose, presetting is required. Con-
ground noise. sult a FURUNO representative.
GAIN control

OFF ON CAUTION
EBL BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN
The auto A/C function can erase weak
targets.
A/C FUNC1 FUNC2 FUNC3 FUNC4
AUTO

Manual anti-clutter control

From the fully counterclockwise position,
1.13 Suppressing Sea Clutter slowly turn the A/C SEA control clockwise.
For optimum target detection, you should
In rough weather conditions returns from leave speckles of the surface return
the sea surface are received over sev- slightly visible.
eral miles around own ship and mask The anti-clutter sea control is often re-
close targets. This situation can be im- ferred to as STC (Sensitivity Time Con-
proved by properly adjusting the A/C SEA trol) which decreases the amplification of
(Anti-Clutter Sea) control. the receiver immediately after a radar
pulse is transmitted, and progressively
OFF ON
increases the sensitivity as the range in-
EBL BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN
creases.
i I

A common mistake is to over-adjust the

A/C
AUTO
FUNC1 FUNC2 FUNC3 FUNC4 A/C SEA control so that the surface clut-
ter is completely removed. By rotating
the control fully clockwise, you will see
how dangerous this can be; a dark zone
A/C AUTO key A/C SEA control
is created near the center of the screen
and close-in targets can be lost. This dark
zone is even more dangerous if the gain

1-14
has not been properly adjusted. Always 1.15 Interference Rejector
leave a little surface clutter visible on the
screen. If no surface clutter is observed Mutual radar interference may occur in the
(on a very calm water), set the control at vicinity of another shipborne radar oper-
the fully counterclockwise position. ating in the same frequency band (9 GHz
for X-band, 3 GHz for S-band). It is seen
on the screen as a number of bright spikes
1.14 Suppressing Precipitation either in irregular patterns or in the form
of usually curved spoke-like dotted lines
Clutter extending from the center to the edge of
the picture. This type of interference can
In adverse weather conditions, clouds, be reduced by activating the interference
rain or snow produce a lot of spray-like rejector circuit.
spurious echoes and impairs target de-
tection over a long distance. This situa- The interference rejector is a kind of sig-
tion can be improved by using a function nal correlation circuit. It compares the re-
key provided that it is so programmed. If ceived signals over successive
the function key fails to offer a favorable transmissions and suppresses randomly
suppression of the rain clutter, adjust the occurring signals. There are three levels
A/C RAIN control on the front control of interference rejection depending on the
panel. number of transmissions that are corre-
lated. These are indicated by the legends
A/C RAIN IR1, IR2 and IR3 at the upper-left posi-
control tion of the screen.

I
OFF

EBL
ON
01 toi
BRILL A/C RAIN
o>
A/C SEA
©
GAIN

A/C FUNC1 FUNC2 FUNC3 FUNC4

AUTO

Mutual radar interference

The A/C RAIN control adjusts the receiver Press the INT REJECT key to activate the
sensitivity as the A/C SEA control does interference rejector circuit. Successive
but rather in a longer time period (longer presses of the key increase the effect of
range). Clockwise rotation of this control interference rejection, up to level 3. A
increases the anti-clutter effect. fourth press deactivates the interference
rejector. Switch off the interference rejec-
tor when no interference exists; otherwise
weak targets may be lost.
HL ECHO
MODE
OFF TRAILS

GUARD
ORIGIN VECTOR
EBL VECTOR
OFF
TRUE/
ALARM
MARK OFFSET
REL CENTER
TIME

A/C RAIN control A/C RAIN control

OFF adjusted X2 BKGR INDEX
ZOOM COLOR LINES

CU, TM INT
RINGS
RESET REJECT

Inside mode panel

1-15
Note: For stable reception of certain types Successive presses of the VRM ON key
of radar beacons (racons) or SART toggle the active VRM between No.1 and
(Search and Rescue Radar Transponder) No.2 and the currently active VRM read-
as required by SOLAS 1974 as amended out is circumscribed by >.....<.
1988 (GMDSS), it is recommended to turn
the interference rejector off. Align the active VRM with the inner edge
of the target of interest and read its dis-
tance at the lower-right corner of the
screen. Each VRM remains at the same
1.16 Measuring the Range geographical distance when you operate
the RANGE+ or RANGE- key. This means
Use the fixed range rings to obtain a rough that the apparent radius of the VRM ring
estimate of the range to a target. They changes in proportion to the selected
are concentric solid circles about own range scale.
ship, or the sweep origin. The number of
rings is automatically determined by the Press the VRM OFF key to key to erase
selected range scale and their interval is each VRM.
displayed at the upper-left position of the
screen. Press the RINGS key on the
mode panel to show the fixed range rings 1.17 Measuring the Bearing
if they are not displayed. Successive
presses of the RINGS key gradually in- Use the Electronic Bearing Lines (EBLs)
crease their brightness in 4 steps and fifth to take bearings of a target. There are two
press erases the range rings. EBLs, No.1 and No.2, which are toggled
by successive presses of the EBL ON key.
Use the Variable Range Markers (VRMs) Each EBL is a straight dashed line extend-
for more accurate measurement of the ing out from the own ship position up to
range to a target. There are two VRMs, the circumference of the radar picture.
No.1 and No.2, which appear as dashed The fine dashed line is the No.1 EBL and
rings so that you can discriminate them the coarse dashed one is the No.2 EBL.
from the fixed range rings. The two VRMs
can be distinguished from each other by Press the EBL ON key to display either of
different lengths of dashes. the EBLs.
^
350 000 010

No.1 330
340 mnn 020
030 Successive presses of the EBL ON key
320 Target
VRM 310
040

050 blip
toggle the active EBL between No.1 and
300 060
No.2 and the currently active EBL read-
290 070 out is circumscribed by >...<.
280 080

270 090
Rotate the EBL rotary control clockwise
260 100
or counterclockwise until the active EBL
250 110
No.2 bisects the target of interest, and read its
240 120
VRM bearing at the lower-left corner of the
230 130 screen.
220 140
210 150
200
190 180 170
160 VRM The EBL readout is affixed by "R" (rela-
>0.665NM<
1.186NM tive) if it is relative to own ship's heading,
Active VRM is identified
"T" (true) if it is referenced to the north,
with this marker.
as determined by RADAR 2 menu set-
Measuring the range tings.
Press the VRM ON key to display either Each EBL carries a range marker, or a
of the VRMs. short line crossing the EBL at right angles
and its distance from the EBL origin is in-
dicated at the VRM readout whether or

1-16
not the corresponding VRM is displayed. If relative motion is selected, it is also
The range marker changes its position possible to read CPA (Closest Point of
along the EBL with the rotation of the VRM Approach) by using a VRM as shown
control. below (Figure (a)). If the EBL passes
through the sweep origin (own ship) as
Press the EBL OFF key to erase each illustrated (Figure (b)), the target ship
EBL. is on a collision course.

No.2 340
350 000 010
020
5. To return the EBL origin to the own
Target
EBL 320
330 030
040
blip
ship's position, press the EBL OFFSET
310 050 key again.
300 060

290 070
350 000 010
340 020
280 080 330 030
320 040
270 090 Cursor
310 050
260 Range scale 100
No.1 300 060
250 markers on EBLs 110 EBL 290 070
240
A
120 280 080
230 130 A1
270 090
220 140
EBL 210 150
VRM 260 100
No.1
> 32.5°T< 200 7ffiTrnTTjTTTr|TTn\ 160 >0.978NM<
298.0°T
190 180 170
1.118NM No.1 250
VRM
110
EBL 240 120
230 130
Active EBL is indicated 220 140
with this marker. EBL
210
200
150
VRM
160
190 180 170 > 3.85NM<
> 140.0°R<

(a) Evaluating target ship's course and

1.18 Collision Assessment by CPA in relative motion mode
Offset EBL 330
340
350 000 010
020
030
320 040
Cursor 310 050
The origin of the EBL can be placed any- 300 060
where with the trackball to enable mea- 290 070

surement of range and bearing between A

280 080
A1 No.1
any targets. This function is also useful 270 090
EBL
for assessment of the potential risk of 260 100

collision. To assess possibility of collision: 250 110

240 120
1. Press the EBL ON key to display or ac- 230 130

tivate an EBL (No.1 or 2). 220

210 150
140

EBL 200
190 180 170
160 VRM
2. Place the cursor (+) on a target of in- > 118.2°R< > 0.00NM<

terest (A in the illustrated example) by

(b) Target ship on collision course
operating the trackball.
3. Press the EBL OFFSET key on the
mode panel, and the origin of the ac-
tive EBL shifts to the cursor position.
Press the EBL OFFSET key again to
anchor the EBL origin.
4. After waiting for a few minutes (at least
3 minutes), operate the EBL control
until the EBL bisects the target at the
new position (A'). The EBL readout
shows the target ship's course, which
may be true or relative depending on
the settings on the RADAR 2 menu.

1-17
1.19 Measuring Range and 1.20 Setting a Guard Zone
Bearing Between Two (Guard Alarm)
Targets
Press the EBL OFFSET key, and place CAUTION
the origin of No.1 EBL, for example, on a The guard zone (guard alarm) feature
target of interest (target 1 in the illustrated should never be relied upon as the sole
example) by operating the trackball. means for detecting the risk of potential
collision. The operator of a ship is not
Turn the EBL control until the EBL passes relieved of the responsibility to keep visual
through another target of interest (target lookout for avoiding collisions, whether or
2). not the radar is in use.
Turn the VRM control until the range
marker aligns with target 2. The active A guard zone (guard alarm) may be set
VRM readout at the lower-right corner of to alert the navigator to targets (ships,
the screen indicates the distance between landmasses, etc.) entering a certain area
the two targets. with visual and audible alarms.

You can repeat the same procedure on The guard zone (guard alarm) has a fixed
third and forth targets (targets 3 and 4) width of 0.5 nm in the radial direction and
by using No.2 EBL and No.2 VRM. is adjustable only within 3.0 to 6.0 nm from
own ship. The guard zone (guard alarm)
Bearing is shown relative to own ship with can be set to any sector angle between 0
suffix "R" or as a true bearing with suffix and 360 degrees in any direction.
"T" depending on EBL relative/true set-
tings on the RADAR 2 menu. To return To set a guard zone (guard alram):
the EBL origin to the own ship position, 1. Place the cursor (+) at point "A" (see
press the EBL OFFSET key again. figure at the top of the next page) us-
No.2
ing the trackball and press the GUARD
Range 350 000 ALARM key on the mode panel (left key
340
010
' prnjmr TTTTTTTTTy 020 EBL
marker
320
330 030
040
group). The message SET GUARD
310
Target 2
050
Range appears at the bottom-right corner of
No.1
300
Target 4
060
marker the screen.
290 070
EBL R2 V
280 Target 1 080
y
R2
270 090
R1 HL ECHO
Target 3 MODE
260 EBL 100 OFF TRAILS
250
origin
110
No.1 VRM
240 120
No.2 VRM ORIGIN
GUARD VECTOR
EBL OFF
230 TRUE/
130 ALARM
MARK OFFSET
REL CENTER
220 140
210 150
EBL 200 160
VRM
190 180 170 > 0.505NM<
> 140.0°R<
335.2°R 0.985NM

Inside mode panel

Range/bearing Range/bearing
between targets between targets
1 and 2 3 and 4

1-18
 GAIN, A/C SEA, and A/C RAIN controls
340
350 000 010
Illfmi /
020
Guard zone to reduce noise to avoid generation of
330 030 (guard alarm) guard alarm against false target detection.
320 040
310 Guard
050 zone (guard alarm)

300 be set060between 3 and

A 6 nm on 070 G-type; at any
290

280
B
distance080from own ship
Inward and outward guard alarms
270
on R- and 090
N-types.
On the R-type, an inward or outward
260 100

250 6 nm guard alarm can be selected on the RA-

110

240 120
DAR 2 menu. On the IMO type, only the
230 130 inward guard alarm is available. The in-
220
210 150
140
3 nm ward guard alarm generates visual and
200
190 180 170
160
audible warnings when an approaching
target enters the guard zone (guard
2. Move the cursor (+) to point "B" and alarm) from any direction. The outward
press the GUARD ALARM key. Then, guard alarm is produced when a target
a guard zone (guard alarm) as illus- leaves the guard zone.
trated is created and the label GUARD
appears instead of SET GUARD at the
lower-right corner of the screen.
Note: If you wish to create a guard
zone (guard alarm) having a 360-
degree coverage around own ship, set
point "B" in almost the same direction
(a) Inward guard (b) Outward guard
(approx. ±3°) as point "A" and press alarm available on alarm available on
the GUARD ALARM key. IMO and R-types R-type only

Silencing audible alarm,

reactivating guard alarm 1.21 Off-Centering
A target entering the guard zone (guard Own ship position, or sweep origin, can
alarm) produces both visual (flashing) and be displaced to expand the view field with-
audible (beeping) alarms. To silence the out switching to a larger range scale. On
audible alarm, press the GUARD ALARM the R-type, the sweep origin can be off-
key, and the label GUARD ACK replaces centered to a point specified by the cur-
GUARD on the display. sor, up to 100% of the range in use in any
This will deactivate the audible alarm but direction. On the IMO-type, the sweep
will not stop the flashing of the target in origin can be off-centered to the cursor
the guard zone (guard alarm). To reacti- position, but not more than 75% of the
vate the audible alarm, press the GUARD range in use; if the cursor is set beyond
ALARM key again. 75% of the range scale, the sweep origin
will be off-centered to the point of 75% of
the limit.
Disabling guard zone (guard alarm)
This feature is not available on the long-
Hold the GUARD ALARM key depressed est range scale. The number of range
for at least 3 seconds. rings increases keeping the original range
intervals unchanged.
Note: The guard alarm is given to targets
having a certain level of echo strength. To off center the radar picture:
This level does not always imply a land- 1. Place the cursor at a position where
mass, reef, ships or other surface objects you wish to move the sweep origin by
but can mean returns from the sea sur- operating the trackball.
face or precipitation. Properly adjust the 1-19
2. Press the OFF CENTER key. Then, the 2. Press the [2] key to select 2 ECHO
sweep origin is off-centered to the cur- STRETCH.
sor position.
3. Press [2] until Echo Stretch option 1, 2
3. To cancel off-centering, press the OFF or OFF as desired is highlighted.
CENTER key again.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your
r selection followed by the RADAR
HL ECHO MODE MENU key to close the FUNCTIONS
OFF TRAILS
menu.

ORIGIN
GUARD VECTOR
EBL VECTOR
OFF Hit [RADAR MENU].
TRUE/
ALARM
MARK OFFSET
REL CENTER
TIME

[FUNCTIONS 1]

1 PULSE WIDTH 1/2

Inside mode panel 2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
4 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/M/BRT
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR*
6 SHIP'S SPEED LOG/NAV*/MAN
7 INDEX LINES NO.2 VRM/MAN
8 SET/DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET 000.0
DRIFT 00.0 KT
9 BRILLIANCE
0 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]

Cursor Cursor * R-type only

Off-centered to cursor position – Max.

offset Enlarged in bearing
100% of range in use on R-type (circumferential)
direction with ES1
75% of range in use on IMO-type
The picture cannot be off centered in
the true motion mode. If a distant target
is hard to see, use
ES 1.

1.22 Echo Stretch (a) Echo stretch 1 for 12 nm range

and above
On long ranges target echoes tend to
shrink in the bearing direction, making Enlarged with
them difficult to see. On short and me- ES2
dium ranges such as 1.5, 3 and 6 nm
scales, the same size targets get smaller
If a target becomes
on screen as they approach the own ship. smaller as it
These are due to the inherent property of approaches own
the radiation pattern produced by the an- ship, use ES 2.
tenna. To enhance target video, use the
echo stretch function. There are two (b) Echo stretch 2 for 1.5–6 nm ranges
types: echo stretch 1 for long range de-
tection and echo stretch 2 on 1.5-6 nm Notes:
scales.
1) If the 1.5 nm range is preset for
To activate the echo stretch:
pulsewidth of S1 (0.08 µs) or S2 (0.2
1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the µs), and the 3 nm scale for S2 (0.2 µs),
plotting keypad to show the FUNC- the echo stretch function is not avail-
TIONS menu. able on these range scales.

1-20
2) The echo stretch function magnifies not 2 or OFF as desired is highlighted.
only small target pips but also returns
from sea surface, rain and radar inter- OFF: No averaging effect
ference. For this reason make sure 1: Helps distinguish targets from
these types of interference have been sea clutter and suppresses
sufficiently suppressed before activat- brilliance of unstable echoes
ing this function. 2: Distinguishes small stationary
targets such as navigation
buoys.
1.23 Echo Averaging 3: Stably displays distant targets.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your
The echo average feature effectively sup- selection followed by the RADAR
presses sea clutter. Echoes received from MENU key to close the FUNCTIONS
stable targets such as ships appear on menu.
the screen at almost the same position
every rotation of the antenna. On the other
hand, unstable echoes such as sea clut-
ter appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea
clutter, this radar performs scan-to-scan
correlation. Correlation is made by stor-
ing and averaging echo signals over suc-
cessive picture frames. If an echo is solid
and stable, it is presented in its normal (a) Echo average OFF (b) Echo average ON
intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over suc-
cessive scans resulting in the reduced bril- Echo averaging uses scan-to-scan signal
liance, making it easier to discriminate real correlation technique based on the true
targets from sea clutter. motion over the ground of each target.
Thus, small stationary targets such as
To properly use the echo average func- buoys will be shown while suppressing
tion, it is recommended to first suppress random echoes such as sea clutter. True
sea clutter with the A/C SEA control and echo average is not however effective for
then do the following: picking up small targets running at high
speeds over the ground.
1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the
plotting keypad to show the FUNC- Echo average is inoperable when a gyro-
TIONS menu. compass signal is not available. If you
wish to use this feature without a gyro-
Hit [RADAR MENU]. compass signal, consult a FURUNO rep-
resentative.
[FUNCTIONS 1]
Manual speed entry is done at menu item
1
2
PULSE WIDTH
ECHO STRETCH
1/2
OFF/1/2
6 SHIP'S SPEED on the FUNCTIONS
3
4
ECHO AVERAGE
PANEL DIMMER
OFF/1/2/3
OFF/DIM/M/BRT
menu which is accessed by pressing the
5
6
ECHO COLOR
SHIP'S SPEED
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
LOG/NAV*/MAN
RADAR MENU key.
7 INDEX LINES NO.2 VRM/MAN
8 SET/DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET 000.0
DRIFT 00.0 KT
9 BRILLIANCE
0 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
CAUTION
* R-type only Do not use the Echo Average feature under
heavy pitching and rolling; loss of true
2. Press the [3] key to select 3 ECHO targets can result.
STRETCH.
3. Press [3] until echo average option 1,
1-21
1.24 Electronic Plotting Aid Plotting a target
(EPA) To perform electronic plotting:
A maximum 10 operator-selected targets 1. Place the cursor(+) on a target of in-
can be plotted electronically (manually) terest by operating the trackball.
to assess their motion trend. Five past po-
2. Select a desired plot no. by pressing
sitions can be displayed for each of the
one of the plot no. keys on the plotting
plotted targets. If you enter a 7th plot on
keypad.
a certain target, the oldest plot (past po-
sition) will be erased. 3. Press the ACQ key on the operator
control panel, and the selected plot no.
A vector appears when you enter a sec- is marked at the cursor position.
ond plot for the target and is updated each
time a new plot is entered. The vector 4. Watching the EPA time (TIM xx:xx)
shows the target motion trend based on shown at the upper right margin of the
its latest two plots. screen, wait for at least 30 seconds.
Place the cursor (+) on the target at its
Alphanumeric readouts at the upper right- new location, select the same plot no.
hand corner of the screen show range, for the target and press the ACQ key.
bearing, course, speed, CPA, TCPA, BCR
and BCT of the last-plotted target. The plot no. moves to the new target
position and previous position is
It should be noted that the true course and marked by a small dot.
true speed data are not updated in real
time. 5. To acquire other targets, repeat the
above steps selecting different plot no.
E-plot label Note: If a target once plotted is not plot-
ted again within 10 minutes, the warning
"UPDATE PLOT No" will appear on the
330
340
350 000 010
020
030
EPA upper right margin of the screen and the
320 040
TRUE VECTOR 1 MIN WT

RNG 4.91NM
plot no. of the target flashes. If you want
310 050

300 060
1
BRG 226.1°T 13:28 to continue plotting this target, reacquire
TRU CSE 263.3°T
290 070 TRU SPD 12.4KT it within five minutes. Otherwise, the tar-
280

270
Vector
080

090
CPA 2.9NM TCPA *** MIN
BCR 8.9NM BCT 20MIN get will be regarded as a "lost target" and
260 100
its plot no. and target data will be erased.
1
250 110 The larger the plotting interval, the less
240

230
120
accurate the plotted target data.
130
220 140
210
200
190 180 170
160
150

Target
When a target has been plotted more than
data once, the radar calculates its motion trend
and automatically displays a vector on the
target.
Note: EPA reguires own speed input (au-
tomatic or manual) and a compass sig- If you make entry of plot at the uninten-
nal. The vector and data are updated on tional position by mistake, re-enter the plot
real time between plot entires. Note that no. at the intentional position within five
the plots will be lost when the compass seconds. Then, a correction is accepted.
fails.

1-22
True or relative vector CSE/SPD (Course/Speed): Course and
speed are displayed for the last-plotted
True vectors can be displayed with refer- target with suffix "TRU" (True) or :"REL"
ence to the north. Press the VECTOR (Relative) plot symbol.
TRUE/REL key to select the proper indi-
cation. This feature is available in all pre- CPA/TCPA: CPA (Closest Point of Ap-
sentation modes (gyrocompass must be proach) is a closest range the target will
working correctly). The current vector approach to own ship. TCPA is the Time
mode is indicated at the upper-right cor- to CPA. Both CPA and TCPA are auto-
ner of the screen. matically calculated. TCPA is counted up
to 99.9 min and beyond this, it is indicated
as TCPA > *99.9 MIN.
Vector time
BCR/BCT: BCR (Bow Cross Range) is
Vector time (or the length of vectors) can the range at which target will cross own
be set to 30 sec, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 15 or 30 ship's bow. BCT (Bow Cross Time) is the
minutes and the selected vector time is estimated time at which target will cross
indicated at the upper-right corner of the own ship's bow. If BCR is negative, BCR
screen. Press the VECTOR TIME key readout should be displayed as *.*. (When
until the desired vector time is reached. BCT is negative, BCT is x.x.)
The vector tip shows an estimated posi-
tion of the target after the selected vector
time elapses. It can be valuable to extend Terminating target plotting
the vector length to evaluate the risk of With EPA you can plot up to 10 targets.
collision with any target. You may wish to terminate plotting of less
important targets to newly plot other
Target data threatening targets.

The radar calculates motion trends By Symbol: To terminate plotting of a cer-

(range, bearing, course, speed, CPA, tain target, press the corresponding plot
TCPA, BCR and BCT) of all plotted tar- no. key. Then press the CANCEL key.
gets. With Trackball: Place the cursor (+) on
In head-up and head-up true bearing a target which you do not want to be
modes, target bearing, course and speed tracked any longer by operating the
shown in the upper-right target data field trackball and press the CANCEL key.
become true (suffix "TRU") or relative (suf- All Targets: To terminate plotting of all
fix "REL") to own ship in accordance with targets at once, press and hold the CAN-
relative vector setting. In north-up, course- CEL key until all plot symbols and marks
up, and true motion modes, the target data disappear in about 3 seconds.
field always displays true bearing, true
course and speed over the ground.
Entering own ship's speed
Reading the target data
EPA requires an own ship speed input and
Press the corresponding plot symbol key, compass signal. The speed can be en-
and the following target data is displayed. tered from a speed log (automatic) or
through the plotting keypad (manual).
RNG/BRG (Range/Bearing): Range and
bearing from own ship to last-plotted tar-
get with suffix "T" (True) or "R" (Relative)
plot symbol.

1-23
Automatic speed input 2. Press the [6] key to select menu 6
SHIP'S SPEED.
1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the
3. Press the [6] key to select (or highlight)
plotting keypad to show the FUNC-
MAN option.
TIONS menu.
4. Press the ENTER key to confirm se-
Hit [RADAR MENU]. lection. At this point, "MAN = XX. KT"
appears at the bottom of FUNCTIONS
[FUNCTIONS 1]
menu.
1 PULSE WIDTH 1/2 5. Enter the ship speed by hitting corre-
2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3 sponding numeric keys followed by the
4 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/M/BRT
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR* ENTER without omitting leading zeros,
6 SHIP'S SPEED LOG/NAV*/MAN
7 INDEX LINES NO.2 VRM/MAN if any. A example, if the ship speed is 8
8 SET/DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET 000.0 knots, [0] [8] [ENTER].
DRIFT 00.0 KT
9 BRILLIANCE
0 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
6. Press the RADAR MENU key to close
FUNCTIONS menu. The ship speed
* R-type only
read at the screen top shows own ship
speed entered preceded by the label
2. Press the [6] key to select menu item 6
"MAN."
SHIP'S SPEED.
3. Press the [6] key to select (or highlight)
LOG option. 1.25 Target Trails (Echo Trails)
4. Press the ENTER key to confirm your
selection followed by the RADAR Echo trails are simulated afterglow of tar-
MENU key to close the FUNCTIONS get echoes that represent their move-
menu. The ship's speed readout at the ments relative to own ship or true
screen top shows own ship's speed fed movements with respect to land in a single
from the speed log preceded by the tone or gradual shading depending on the
label "LOG." settings on the RADAR 1 menu.

Notes:
True or relative trails
1) IMO Resolution A.823(19) for ARPA
recommends that a speed log to be in- You may display echo trails in true or rela-
terfaced with an ARPA should be ca- tive motion. Relative trails show relative
pable of providing through-the-water movements between targets and own
speed data. ship. True motion trails require a gyrocom-
pass signal and own ship speed input to
2) Be sure not to select LOG when a cancel out own ship's movement and
speed log is not connected. If the log present true target movements in accor-
signal is not provided, the ship's speed dance with their over-the-ground speeds
readout at the screen top will be blank. and courses. Refer to the automatic and
manual speed input procedures for en-
Manual speed input tering own ship's speed information.

If the radar is not interfaced with a speed

log, or the speed log does not feed cor-
rect speed enter the ship's speed as fol-
lows:
1. Press the RADAR MENU key on plot-
ting keypad to show the FUNCTIONS
menu.

1-24
 Hit [RADAR MENU].

I
[FUNCTIONS 1]

1 PULSE WIDTH 1/2

2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
4 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/M/BRT
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR*
6 SHIP'S SPEED LOG/NAV*/MAN
7 INDEX LINES NO.2 VRM/MAN
8 SET/DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET 000.0
DRIFT 00.0 KT
(a) True echo trails without
9 BRILLIANCE
smearing of stationary targets 0 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]

* R-type only
Hit [0].

[FUNCTIONS 2]

1 [FUNCTIONS]
2 RADAR 1
3 FUNCTION KEY 1
4 FUNCTION KEY 2
5 FUNCTION KEY 3
6 FUNCTION KEY 4
7 RADAR 1/2
8 ANCHOR WATCH
9
0 [SYSTEM SETTING 2]
(b) Relative echo trails painted
on all targets moving relative Hit [2].
to own ship [RADAR 1]
1 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
2
3
Note: When true trail is selected on the 4
5
RM mode, the legend TRUE TRAIL ap- 6
7
TRAIL REF
TRAIL GRAD
REL/TRUE
SGL/MULT
pears in red. No true-relative selection on 8
9
[PULSE WD 1]
[PULSE WD 2]
TM, it is only TRUE TRAIL on TM mode. 0 RADAR 2

To select true or relative echo trail pre-

sentation:
1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the
plotting keypad to show the FUNC-
TIONS menu.
2. Press the [0] key to show the SYSTEM
SETTING 1 menu.
3. Press the [2] key to show the RADAR
1 menu.
4. Press the [6] key to select menu item 6
TRAIL REF.
5. Press the [6] key to select (or highlight)
REL (Relative) or TRUE option.
6. Press the ENTER key to confirm your
selection followed by the RADAR
MENU key to close the menu.

1-25
Trail gradation Suppose that "3 MIN" has just been se-
lected. If the ECHO TRAILS key is hit
Echo trails may be shown in monotone more than 5 seconds later, echo trails are
or gradual shading. Gradual shading removed from the display (memory still
paints the trails getting thinner with time alive with echo trail timer count going on).
just like the afterglow on an analog PPI Next hitting of the key calls out the echo
radar. trails on the screen. To proceed to longer
plot intervals, successively push the
ECHO TRAILS key with a hit-and-release
action. The larger the echo trail length,
the larger the echo trail plot interval.
Monotone Gradual shading
(Single) (Multi) Note: Holding the ECHO TRAILS key de-
pressed for about 3 seconds will cause a
Selection of monochrome or gradual loss of echo trail data so far stored in an
shading requires almost the same opera- in memory.
tion as for true or relative trails setup pro-
cedure described above except that you
should: Resetting echo trails
- Press the [7] key to select menu To reset (or clear) the echo trail memory,
item 7 TRAIL GRAD (graduation) in hold the ECHO TRAILS key depressed
step 4. for about 3 seconds. Echo trails are
cleared and the trailing process restarts
- Press the [7] key to select (or high- from time count zero at current echo trail
light) SGL (single tone) or MULT plot interval. When memory assigned to
(multiple shading) option in step 5. echo trailing becomes the echo trail timer
at the lower-right corner of the screen
Displaying and erasing echo trails freezes and the oldest trails are erased
to show the latest trails.
Press the ECHO TRAILS key to activate
or deactivate the echo trails feature.
r 1.26 Parallel Index Lines
HL ECHO MODE
OFF TRAILS Parallel index lines are useful for keeping
a constant distance between own ship
ORIGIN
GUARD VECTOR
EBL VECTOR
OFF
and a coastline or a partner ship when
ALARM
MARK
TRUE/
OFFSET
REL CENTER
TIME navigating. Index lines are drawn in par-
allel with the No.2 EBL (No.2 EBL must
be active). The orientation of the index
lines is controlled with the EBL control and
Each press of the ECHO TRAILS key the intervals between the lines adjusted
within 5 seconds cyclically changes echo with the VRM rotary control (provided that
trail length (time) to 30 seconds, 1, 3, 6, No.2 VRM is active).
15 and 30 minutes, continuous echo trail-
ing and OFF. The current echo trail set- Maximum number of the index line can
ting is displayed at the lower-right corner be set the Initial Setting menu: 2, 3 or 6.
of the screen.
OFF → 30 sec → 1 min → 3 min → 6 min

Continuous ← 30 min ← 15 min ↵

↵

1-26
 Adjusting index line intervals
No.2 EBL 1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the
plotting keypad to show the FUNC-
TIONS menu.
/
Index lines Hit [RADAR MENU].

[FUNCTIONS 1]

1 PULSE WIDTH 1/2

2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
4 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/M/BRT
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR*
6 SHIP'S SPEED LOG/NAV*/MAN
7 INDEX LINES NO.2 VRM/MAN
Displaying and erasing the index 8 SET/DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET 000.0
DRIFT 00.0 KT
lines
9 BRILLIANCE
0 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
1. Press the INDEX LINES key if the in-
* R-type only
dex lines are not already shown.
2. Make sure that the No.2 EBL is active 2. Press the [7] key to select menu item 7
and orient the index lines in a desired INDEX LINES.
direction with the EBL rotary control. 3. Press the [7] key to select (or highlight)
3. To erase the index lines, press the IN- No.2 VRM or MAN (manual) option.
DEX LINES key again.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your
selection.
HM ECHO 5. If you have selected MAN in step 3
MODE
OFF TRAILS
above, "MAN = XX.XX NM" appears
at the bottom of the FUNCTIONS
GUARD
ORIGIN VECTOR VECTOR
OFF
EBL
TRUE/ menu. Enter a desired line interval by
ALARM
MARK OFFSET
REL CENTER
TIME
hitting numeric keys followed by the
ENTER key without omitting leading
X2 BKGR INDEX zeroes, if any. There are six index lines
ZOOM COLOR LINES but the number of lines visible on the
screen may be less than six depend-
CU, TM INT
RINGS
ing on the line setting interval.
RESET REJECT
6. If you have selected NO.2 VRM in step
Inside mode panel 3 above, make sure that the No.2 VRM
is active and adjust the spacing be-
tween the index lines by operating the
VRM control.
7. Press the RADAR MENU key to close
the FUNCTIONS menu.

1-27
1.27 Anchor Watch 3. Press the [3] key to select menu item 3
ALARM OFF/ON. Further press the [3]
The anchor watch feature helps you moni- key to select (or highlight) ON or OFF,
tor whether own ship is dragged by wind followed by the ENTER key to conclude
and/or tide while at anchor. This feature your selection. (This operation deter-
requires ship position data from a suitable mines whether to activate the anchor
radio navigational aid. Provided that own watch audible alarm.)
ship's physical data has been entered, an
own ship mark can be displayed when the Alarm range setting
anchor watch feature is activated. The
message "ANCHOR WATCH ERR" ap- Press the [4] key to select menu item 4
pears in red when position data is not in- ALARM RANGE on the ANCHOR
putted. WATCH menu. Enter a desired alarm
range between 0.1 and 9.999 nm with
Notes:
numeric keys and press the ENTER key
1) The own ship mark is available on the to conclude your key input.
R-type radar only; unavailable on the
An anchor watch alarm circle thus estab-
IMO type.
lished shows up as a red circle on the
2) The own ship mark is created with data screen. When own ship is dragged out of
on ship's length, width, radar antenna this alarm circle, an audible alarm is gen-
location, etc. To display an own ship erated and the on-screen label ANCHOR
mark, ask your nearest FURUNO rep- WATCH turns red.
resentative or dealer.
To silence the audible alarm, press the
AUDIO OFF key on the control panel.
Anchor watch in standby or Hit [RADAR MENU].
transmit status
11

IMO-type [FUNCTIONS 1]

1 PULSE WIDTH 1/2

On the IMO type the anchor watch fea- 2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
ture is available only in STANDBY status. 4
5
PANEL DIMMER
ECHO COLOR
OFF/DIM/M/BRT
YEL/GRN/COLOR*
6 SHIP'S SPEED LOG/NAV*/MAN
7 INDEX LINES NO.2 VRM/MAN
R-type 8 SET/DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET 000.0
DRIFT 00.0 KT
On the R-type the anchor watch feature 9 BRILLIANCE
is available in either STANDBY or 0 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]

TRANSMIT status. * R-type only

Hit [0].

[SYSTEM SETTING 1]
Activating anchor watch
1 [FUNCTIONS]
2 RADAR 1
To set up the anchor watch feature: 3 FUNCTION KEY 1
4 FUNCTION KEY 2
5 FUNCTION KEY 3
1. On the ANCHOR WATCH menu, press 6 FUNCTION KEY 4
the [2] key to select menu item 2 AN- 7
8
RADAR
ANCHOR WATCH
1/2

CHOR WATCH OFF/ON. 9

0 [SYSTEM SETTING 2]

2. Further press the [2] key to select (or

Hit [9].
highlight) ON, followed by the ENTER
key to conclude your selection. The [ANCHOR WATCH]
*
label WATCH appears at the lower-left 1 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
OFF/ON
corner of the screen. 2
3
ANCHOR WATCH
ALARM OFF/ON
4 ALARM RANGE 0.000 NM
5 HISTORY OFF/ON

1-28
Showing drag line 1.28 Origin Mark
Press the [5] key to select menu item 5 You can mark any dangerous point, promi-
HISTORY on the ANCHOR WATCH nent target or a particular reference point
menu. Further press the [5] key to select using the origin mark feature. This mark
(or highlight) ON, followed by the ENTER is geographically fixed.
key to conclude your selection.
To use the origin mark:
A drag line, or a series of dots along which
own ship was carried by wind and water 1. Place the cursor (+) at a point where
current, appears as illustrated below. you want to place a reference mark by
During the first 50-minute period, dots or operating the trackball.
own ship's past positions are plotted ev- 2. Press the ORIGIN MARK key on the
ery minute. When 50 dots have been plot- plotting keypad. The origin mark ap-
ted in 50 minutes, the plot interval pears at the cursor position of which
becomes 2 minutes and up to 25 dots are range and bearing are indicated at the
plotted during the succeeding 50-minute lower-left section of the screen.
period. Next, the dot interval becomes 4
minutes and the maximum number of dots 3. To measure the range and bearing to
will be 12. a target of interest from the origin mark,
move the cursor to the target of inter-
Initial own ship est. Then, the range and bearing from
position the origin mark to the target are shown
at the target data display.

Dragged
4. To erase the origin mark, press the
positions ORIGIN MARK key once again.
Alarm circle
Present own ORIGIN VECTOR
TRUE/
VECTOR RADAR
ship position MARK REL TIME MENU

Plotting keypad

(a) Anchor watch in 350 000 010

true motion mode 320
330
340
imiUm
020
030
040
310 050

300 060

290 070
Present own
ship position
280
I Origin 080

270
mark 090

260 100 +3.1NM

••
250 110 123.5°T
240
/ 120

Alarm
circle f
Own ship's past
230
220
210
200
190 180 170
160
150
140
130

Origin
mark data
positions dragged
by wind/tide

(b) Anchor watch in

head-up mode

1-29
1.29 Zoom pears at zero degrees on the bearing
scale in head-up mode, in any direction
The zoom function is available on the R- depending on the ship orientation in north-
type radar only to enlarge an area of in- up and true motion modes.
terest.
Temporarily erasing heading marker
1. Place the cursor (+) close to the point
of interest by operating the trackball. To temporarily extinguish the heading
2. Press the X2 ZOOM key. The area marker to look at targets existing dead
around the cursor and own ship is en- ahead of own ship, press the HM OFF
larged twice as large as the original size key on the mode panel. The heading
and the label ZOOM appears at the marker reappears when the key is re-
lower-left corner of the screen. leased.
3. To cancel zoom, press the X2 ZOOM
key again. North marker
Note: The zoom feature is inoperative The north marker appears as a short
when the display is off centered. dashed line. In the head-up mode, the
north marker moves around the bearing
r scale in accordance with the compass
HL ECHO signal.
MODE
OFF TRAILS

VECTOR
Stern marker
GUARD
ORIGIN EBL VECTOR
OFF
TRUE/
ALARM
MARK OFFSET
REL CENTER
TIME
The stern marker (a dot-and-dash line)
appears opposite to the heading marker.
X2 BKGR INDEX This marker can be displayed on the R-
ZOOM COLOR LINES type only provided that STERN MARK ON
is selected on the RADAR 2 menu.

ZOOM key is available on R-type only.

Blank key top on N- and G-types. 1.31 Menu Keys
Three menu keys are provided on the plot-
ting keypad: RADAR MENU, E-AUTO
+
PLOT MENU and NAV MENU keys.
+

RADAR MENU: Permits setting of basic

Cursor
Cursor radar parameters.
E, AUTO PLOT MENU: Provides a choice
of standard or large size of plotting sym-
bols for plot.
(a) Cursor placed at (b) Zoom in
point of interest (R-type only) NAV MENU: Provides a choice of navi-
gation data for on-screen display. Also
selects display data for the Video Plotter.
1.30 Markers ORIGIN VECTOR
TRUE/
VECTOR RADAR o © A
MARK REL TIME MENU 1 2 3

Heading marker TARGET

ORIGIN
MARK
DATA
VECTOR
TARGET
BASED
TRUE/
DATA
REL
VECTOR
AUTO
PLOT
TIME
A o
4 5 6
E,AUTO
PLOT
MENU
The heading marker indicates the ship's TRIAL
LOST
TARGET
HISTORY 0 ©
7 8 9

heading in all presentation modes. It ap- MARK

CHART VIDEO NAV CANCEL $ ENTER
ALIGN PLOT MENU – 9

1-30
1.32 RADAR 1 and 2 Menu Settings
R-type

Hit [RADAR MENU].

i
[FUNCTIONS 1] [FUNCTIONS 1] menu
1 PULSE WIDTH 1/2
2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3 5 ECHO COLOR: Targets are painted in monochrome
4 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/M/BRT yellow, green or full colors (red, yellow and green
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR *
6 SHIP'S SPEED LOG/NAV7MAN according to echo strengths).
7 INDEX LINES NO.2 VRM/MAN
8 SET/DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET 000.0°
DRIFT 00.0 KT
9 BRILLIANCE
0 [FUNCTIONS 2]

* R-type only
Hit [0].

[FUNCTIONS 2] [FUNCTIONS 2] menu

1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 RADAR 1 6 RADAR: Select 1 for single radar installation or for
3 FUNCTION KEY 1 connecting to antenna unit No.1 on a dual radar
4 FUNCTION KEY 2
5 FUNCTION KEY 3 installation; 2 for connecting to antenna unit No.2 on
6 FUNCTION KEY 4
7 RADAR 1 1/ 2 a dual radar installation.
8 ANCHOR WATCH
9
0 [RADAR 1]

Hit [2].
[RADAR 1] [RADAR 1] menu
1 [FUNCTIONS 2]
2
3 6 TRAIL REF: Select REL to show relative trails;
4 TRUE to show true echo trails.
5
6 TRAIL REF REL/TRUE 7 TRAIL GRAD: Select SGL to show echo trails in
7 TRAIL GRAD SGL/MULT single tone; MULT to show them in multiple
8 [PULSEWD 1]
9 [PULSEWD 2] shading.
0 RADAR2

Hit [0].
[RADAR 2]
[RADAR 2] menu
1 [RADAR 11
2 +CURSOR EBL RELTRUE 2 CURSOR EBL: Select REL to read relative bearing
3 NOISE REJ OFF/ON of the cursor and EBL; TRUE to read true bearing
4 STERN MARK OFF/ON
5 SHIPS MARK OFF/ON of them.
6 GUARD ALARM IN/OUT 3 NOISE REJ: Select ON to activate noise rejector,
7 KEY BEEP •
L/M/H
8 AUDIO ALARM L/M/H OFF to deactivate it.
9 RADAR NO. 1/2 4 STERN MARK: Select ON to show stem marker;
0 2ND ECHO OFF/ON
OFF to hide it.
5 SHIP’S MARK: Select ON to show own ship's
marker; OFF to hide it.
6 GUARD ALARM: Select IN for inward guard zone
alarm; OUT for outward guard zone alarm.
7 KEY BEEP: Select sound level of key beep from L
(low), M (medium), and H (high).
8 AUDIO ALARM: Select sound level of key beep from L
(low), M (medium), and H (high).
9 RADAR NO.: Designate Radar No.1 or 2 on a dual
radar installation. Select 1 on a single radar installation.
(Note: Do not change the original setting. Consult
a FURUNO representative or dealer for details.)

1-31
IMO-type radar

IMO-type radar

Hit [RADAR MENU].

1
[FUNCTIONS 1] [FUNCTIONS 1] menu
1 PULSE WIDTH 1/2
2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3 5 ECHO COLOR: Targets are painted in monochrome
4 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/M/BRT yellow or green as selected.
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN
6 SHIP’S SPEED LOG/MAN
7 INDEX UNES NO .2 VRM/MAN
8 SET/DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET 000.0°
DRIFT 00.0 KT
9 BRILLIANCE
0 [FUNCTIONS 2]

Hit [0].

[FUNCTIONS 2]
1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
2 RADAR 1
3 FUNCTION KEY 1
4 FUNCTION KEY 2
5 FUNCTION KEY 3
6 FUNCTION KEY 4
8 ANCHOR WATCH
9
0 [RADAR 1]

Hit [2].
[RADAR 1] [RADAR 1] menu
1 [FUNCTIONS 2]
2
3 6 TRAIL REF: Select REL to show relative trails;
4 TRUE to show true echo trails.
5
6 TRAIL REF RELTRUE 7 TRAIL GRAD: Select SGL to show echo trails in
7 TRAIL GRAD SGL/MULT single tone; MULT to show them in multiple
8 [PULSE WD 1]
9 [PULSE WD 2] shading.
0 RADAR2

Hit [0].
[RADAR 2]
[RADAR 2] menu
1 [RADAR 1]
2 +CURSOR EBL RELTRUE 2 CURSOR EBL: Select REL to read relative bearing
3 NOISE REJ OFF/ON of the cursor and EBL; TRUE to read true bearing
4
5 SHIP’S MARK OFF/ON of them.
6 3 NOISE REJ: Select ON to activate noise rejector;
7
8 AUDIO ALARM L/M/H OFF to deactivate it.
9 5 SHIP’S MARK: Select ON to show own ship’s marker
0 2ND ECHO OFF/ON
OFF to hide it.
8 AUDIO ALARM: Select sound level of key beep from L
(low), M (medium), and H (high).

1-32
1.33 Function Keys Suppose that you have been navigating
along a coast for hours and now you are
The four function keys (#1-4) on the con- approaching a harbor, your final destina-
trol panel work like the auto-dialing fea- tion. You will have to adjust your radar to
ture of a telephone, instantly calling out change from the settings for coastal navi-
desired settings to perform specially as- gation to those for harbor approach. Ev-
signed functions. The function keys pro- ery time your navigating environment or
vide optimum radar settings for a specific task changes, you must adjust the radar,
purpose with a single key operation. which can be a nuisance in a busy situa-
tion. Instead of changing radar settings
Each function key can be assigned a com- case by case, it is possible to assign the
bination of particular radar settings that function keys to provide optimum settings
will be most suited to your specific navi- for often encountered situations.
gating purpose, and an adhesive label
(such as BUOY, HARBOR, COAST or the The radar's internal computer offers sev-
like) is usually attached to the key top for eral picture setup options to be assigned
easy identification of the assigned pur- to each function key for your specific navi-
pose. gating requirements. For instance, one of
the function keys may be assigned the
The individual function keys are preset, buoy detecting function and labeled
or programmed, for the following pur- BUOY on the key top. If you press this
poses by qualified service personnel at key, the radar will be instantly set for opti-
the time of installation using the proce- mum detection of navigation buoys and
dures described in the succeeding para- similar objects and the label BUOY is
graphs: shown at the left margin of the screen. If
you re-press the same key, the radar re-
Function key #1: Picture setup
turns to the previous settings.
Function keys #2 and #3: Picture setup
and specific
operation
Function key #4: Specific operation or
watch alarm

Picture setup

OFF ON OFF ON

EBL BRILL A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN VRM

ACQ

A/C ST-BY
AUTO FUNC1 FUNC2 FUNC3 FUNC4
TX

RANGE AUDIO
OFF

Function key #1
Function key #2

Function key #3

Function key #4

1-33
The picture setup options assignable to Note: Function key presetting requires a
any of the function keys are shown in the good knowledge of optimum radar set-
table below. tings. If you want to change the original
function key settings, consult your near-
Picture setup options for function keys est FURUNO representative or dealer.

Label Description Specific operation

RIVER Optimum setting for
navigation on a river. Most often used controls are placed on
the center panel while less often used
BUOY Optimum setting for detecting controls are provided inside the covered
navigation buoys, small compartments on the right and left sides.
vessels and other small To avoid opening the covers or menus to
surface objects. set up the radar for a particular situation,
SHIP Optimum setting for detecting function keys #2, #3 and #4 may be as-
vessels. signed a combination of the following set-
SHORT Optimum setting for short tings at the time of installation.
range detection using a range
scale of 6 nm or larger. - Head-up, Course-up, North-up or True
Motion (See paragraph 1.9.)
CRUISING For cruising using a range - Echo trails (See paragraph 1.25.)
scale of 1.5 nm or larger. - Course-up and True Motion reset
HARBOR Optimum setting for short function (See paragraph 1.9.)
range navigation in a harbor - Off-centering (See paragraph 1. 21.)
area using a range scale of 1.5 - Echo stretch 1 or 2 (See paragraph
nm or less. 1.22.)
COAST For coastal navigation using a - Pulsewidth 1 or 2 (See paragraph
range of 12 nm or less. 1.11.)
- Echo averaging 1, 2 or 3 (See para-
OCEAN Transoceanic voyage using a graph 1 .23.)
range scale of 12 nm or
- Echo color (See paragraph 1.32.)
larger.
- Echo trail graduation (See paragraph
ROUGH Optimum setting for rough 1.23.)
SEA weather or heavy rain. - Panel illumination
- Label brilliance
- Noise rejection
Provided that the function key is assigned
Each picture setup option defines a com- the specific operation feature, press the
bination of several radar settings for key to instantly set the radar for the pre-
achieving optimum setup for a particular set purpose. The corresponding label will
navigating situation. Those involved are be displayed at the left margin of the
interference rejector, echo stretch, echo screen. If you re-press the function key,
average, automatic anti-clutter, the radar returns to the previous settings.
pulsewidth and noise rejector settings.
Adjusting these features on a function key Note: Function key presetting requires a
menu changes the original function key good knowledge of optimum radar set-
settings. To restore the original settings tings. If you want to change the original
for a particular function key, it is neces- function key settings, consult your near-
sary to display the relevant function key est FURUNO representative or dealer.
menu and select appropriate menu op-
tions.

1-34
Watch alarm
The watch alarm sounds an external
buzzer selected time intervals to help you
keep regular watch of the radar picture
for safety or other purposes. This feature
can be assigned to function key #4 with a
choice of alarm intervals of 3, 6, 10, 12,
15 and 20 minutes. (See the flowchart on
page 1-39 for keystroke sequence.)
Provided that function key #4 is assigned
the watch alarm feature, just press func-
tion key #4 to activate the feature. The
label WATCH appears at the lower-left
corner of the screen associated with a
watch alarm timer counts down from the
initial value (namely, "12:00").
When an audible watch alarm is released
the preset time interval has elapsed, the
screen label WATCH turns red and the
watch alarm timer freezes at "0:00."
To silence the alarm, press the AUDIO
key. The label WATCH turns to normal
color and the watch alarm timer is reset
to the initial value and starts the count-
down sequence again.
If you press the AUDIO OFF key before
the selected time interval is reached, the
watch alarm timer is reset to the initial
value and starts the count-down se-
quence again.

1-35
 Setting for function key #1

Hit [RADAR MENU],

[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 PULSE WIDTH 1/2
2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
4 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/M/BRT
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR
6 SHIP'S SPEED LOG/NAV/MAN
7 INDEX LINES NO.2 VRM/MAN
8 2ND ECHO REJ OFF/ON
9 BRILLIANCE
0 [FUNCTION 2]
Hit [FUNC 1] key.

i
[FUNCTION KEY 1]
Hit [0].

1 [SYSTEM SETTING 11 [FUNCTIONS 2]

2 FUNCTION FUN6l/(RIVER)/BUOY/
SHIP/SHORT/LONG/ 1 FUNCTIONS 1]
CRUISING/HARBOR/ 2 RADAR 1
Hit [3]. 3 FUNCTION KEY 1
COAST/OCEAN/
ROUGH SEA/ 4 FUNCTION KEY 2
3 INT REJECT OFF/1/2/3 5 FUNCTION KEY 3
4 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2 6 FUNCTION KEY 4
5 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/ON 7 RADAR 2 1/2
6 A/C AUTO OFF/ON 8 ANCHOR WATCH
7 [FUNC1 PULSE WD ] 9
8 NOISE REJ OFF/ON 0 [FUNCTIONS 3]

Hit [7].

[FUNC 1 PULSE WD]

Notes:
1 ) Menu item 7 RADAR1 /2 on the FUNCTIONS 2
1 [FUNCTION KEY 1]
2 0.5 NM S1/S2 menu is not shown on the IMO-type.
3 0.75 NM S1/S2
4 1.5 NM S1/S2/M1
5 3 NM S2/M1/M2 2) Items 3 through 8 in the FUNCTION KEY
6 6 NM M1/M2/L 1 menu should be left to the original
7 12-24 NM M2/L
(default) settings. For further information
contact a FURUNO representative or
dealer.

Picture Setup Default for Function Keys 1, 2 and 3

To restore default settings, select appropriate function again and close the menu.

3. INT 6. A/C
8.
12-
REJ
4. E. S . 5. E. A. AUTO
NOISE 0.5NM 0.75NM 1.5NM 3 NM 6NM
24NM
REJ
RIVER 2 1 OFF OFF OFF S S1 S1 S2 M1 M2
BUOY 3 2 3 OFF ON S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L
SHIP 3 2 3 OFF ON S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L
SHORT 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF S1 S1 S1 S2 M1 M2
LONG 3 2 3 OFF ON S1 S1 S1 S2 M1 M2
CRUISING 3 3 3 OFF ON S2 S2 S2 M2 L L
HARBOR 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF S1 S1 S1 S2 M1 M2
COAST 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF S1 S1 S2 M1 L L
OCEAN 2 OFF 3 OFF OFF S1 S2 S2 M1 M2 L
ROUGH SEA 2 OFF 2 ON OFF S1 S1 S2 M1 M2 L

1-36
Setting for function key #2

Hit [RADAR MENU].

i
[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 PULSEWIDTH 1/2
2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
Hit [FUNC 2] key. 3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
4 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/M/BRT
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR
i
[FUNCTION KEY 2]
Hit [5].
6
7
8
SHIP'S SPEED
INDEX LINES
2ND ECHO REJ
LOG/NAV/MAN
NO.2 VRM/MAN
OFF/ON
1 [FUNCTIONS 2] 9 BRILLIANCE
2 FUNCKEY 2 PICTURE/OPERATION 0 [FUNCTIONS 2]
3 FUNCTION FUNC2/RIVER/BUOY
SHIP/SHORT/LONG/
CRUISING/HARBOR/ Hit [0].
COAST/OCEAN/
ROUGH SEA/ [FUNCTIONS 2]
OFF/1/2/3
4 INT REJECT OFF/1/2 1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
5 ECHO STRETCH OFF/ON 2 RADAR 1
6 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/ON 3 FUNCTION KEY 1
7 A/C AUTO 4 FUNCTION KEY 2
8 [FUNC2 PULSE WD] 5 FUNCTION KEY 3
9 NOISE REJ OFF/ON 6 FUNCTION KEY 4
7 RADAR 1/2
8 ANCHOR WATCH
Hit [8]. 9
0 [FUNCTIONS 3]
[FUNC 2 PULSE WD]
1 [FUNCTION KEY 2]
2 0.5 NM S1/S2
3 0.75 NM S1/S2
4 1.5 NM S1/S2/M1 Hit [2] twice to select OPERATION
5 3 NM S2/M1/M2 followed with the ENTER key, and
6 6 NM M1/M2/L
the menu changes as shown below:
7 -
12 24 NM M2/L

[FUNCTION KEY 2]
1 [SYSTEM SETTING 11
2 FUNCKEY2 PICTURE/OPERATION
3 OPERATION HU/HU TB/CU/NU/TM/
TRAIL/CU, TM RESET/
OFFCENTER/
IDX LINES/CURSOR OFFSET/
ECHO STRETCH1/ECHO STRETCH2/
PLS WD1/PLS WD2/
ECHO AVG1/ECHO AVG2/ECHO AVG3/
ECHO COLOR/TRAIL BRILL/PANEL BRILL/
CHAR BRILL/ NOISE REJ/
TARGET DATA/CANCEL

Notes:

1) Menu item 7 RADAR 1/2 on the FUNCTIONS 2 menu is not shown on the IMO-type.

2) Items 4 through 9 on FUNCTION KEY 2 menu should be left in the default setting.
For further information contact a FURUNO representative or dealer.

1-37
Setting for function key #3

Setting for function key #3

Hit [RADAR MENU].

[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 PULSEWIDTH 1/2
2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
Hit [FUNC 3] key. 4 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/M/BRT
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR
i
[FUNCTION KEY 3]
Hit [5].
6
7
8
SHIPS SPEED
INDEX LINES
2ND ECHO REJ
LOG/NAV/MAN
NO .2 VRM/MAN
OFF/ON
1 [SYSTEM SETTING 11 9 BRILLIANCE
2 FUNCKEY3 PICTURE/OPERATION 0 [FUNCTIONS 2]
3 FUNCTION FUNC3/RIVER/BUOY
SHIP/SHORT/LONG/
CRUISING/HARBOR/ Hit [0].
COAST/OCEAN/
ROUGH SEA/ [FUNCTIONS 2]
OFF/1/2/3
4 INT REJECT OFF/1/2 1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
5 ECHO STRETCH OFF/ON 2 RADAR 1
6 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/ON 3 FUNCTION KEY 1
7 A/C AUTO 4 FUNCTION KEY 2
8 [FUNC3 PULSE WD] 5 FUNCTION KEY 3
9 NOISE REJ OFF/ON 6 FUNCTION KEY 4
7 RADAR 1/2
8 ANCHOR WATCH
Hit [8]. 9
0 [FUNCTIONS 3]
[FUNC 3 PULSE WD]
1 [FUNCTION KEY 2]
2 0.5 NM S1/S2
3 0.75 NM S1/S2 Hit [2] twice to select OPERATION
4 1.5 NM S1/S2/M1
5 3 NM S2/M1/M2 followed with the ENTER key, and
6 6 NM M1/M2/L the menu changes as shown below:
7 12-24 NM M2/L

[FUNCTION KEY 3]
1 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
2 FUNCKEY3 PICTURE/OPERATION
3 OPERATION HU/HU TB/CU/NU/TM/
TRAIL/CU, TM RESET/
OFFCENTER/

IDX LINES/CURSOR OFFSET/

ECHO STRETCH1/ECHO STRETCH2/
PLS WD1/PLS WD2/
ECHO AVG1/ECHO AVG2/ECHO AVG3/
ECHO COLOR/TRAIL BRILL/PANEL BRILL/
CHAR BRILL/ NOISE REJ/
TARGET DATA/CANCEL

Notes:

1) Menu intern 7 RADAR 1/2 on the FUNCTIONS 2 menu is not shown on the IMO-type.

2) Items 4 through 9 on FUNCTION KEY 3 menu should be left in the default setting.
For further information contact a FURUNO representative or dealer.

1-38
Setting for function key #4

Setting for function key #4

Hit [RADAR MENU].

[FUNCTIONS 1]
1 PULSEWIDTH 1/2
2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
Hit [FUNC 4] key. 3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
4 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/M/BRT
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR
i
[FUNCTION KEY 4]
Hit [6].
6
7
8
SHIPS SPEED
INDEX LINES
2ND ECHO REJ
LOG/NAV/MAN
NO .
2 VRM/MAN
OFF/ON
1 [SYSTEM SETTING 1] 9 BRILLIANCE
2 FUNCKEY4 PICTURE/OPERATION 0 [FUNCTIONS 2]
3 OPERATION HU/HU TB/CU/NU/TM/
TRAIL/CU, TM RESET/
OFFCENTER/
IDX LINES/CURSOR OFFSET/
l Hit [0]
[FUNCTIONS 2]
.

ECHO STRETCH1/ECHO STRETCH2/

PLS WD1/PLS WD2/ 1 [FUNCTIONS 1]
ECHO AVG1/ECHO AVG2/ECHO AVG3/ 2 RADAR 1
ECHO COLOR/TRAIL BRILL/PANEL BRILL/ 3 FUNCTION KEY 1
CHAR BRILL/ NOISE REJ/ 4 FUNCTION KEY 2
TARGET DATA/CANCEL 5 FUNCTION KEY 3
6 FUNCTION KEY 4
7 RADAR 1/2
8 ANCHOR WATCH
Hit [8]. 9
0 [FUNCTIONS 3]
[FUNC 3 PULSE WD]
1 [FUNCTION KEY 2]
2 0.5 NM S1/S2
3 0.75 NM S1/S2
4 1.5 NM S1/S2/M1 Hit [2] twice to select WATCH ALARM
5 3 NM S2/M1/M2 followed with the ENTER key, and
6 6 NM M1/M2/L
7 12-24 NM M2/L the menu changes as shown below:
[FUNCTION KEY 4]
1 [ SYSTEM SETTING 2]
2 FUNCKEY4 OPERATION/WATCH ALARM
3 ALARM INTERVAL 6/10/12/15/20 MIN

1.34 EPA Menu 2. MARK SIZE: Change the size of the

plotting.

Hit [E, AUTO PLOT MENU]. 3. PLOT NO.: Displays or hides plot num-
I ber at the rigth side of the plot symbol
[EPA] (circle and square). The selected tar-
1 CPA/TCPA WARNING
CPA 0.0NM
OFF/ON get (square) has its number though
TCPA 00.0 MIN PLOT NO. is OFF.
2 MARK SIZE STD/LARGE
3 PLOT NO. OFF/ON 4. REL VECT TGT DATA: When the tar-
4 REL VECT TGT DATA REL/TRUE
5 AUDIO ALARM OFF/ON get vector is relative, select the target
data mode REL(ative) or TRUE on HU
and HUTB. For CU, NU and NUTM
EPA menu appears by pressing the E,
modes, the target data is always TRUE.
AUTO PLOT MENU key. You can set the
following items. 5. AUDIO ALARM: Select the audio alarm
On or OFF for the target generating the
1. COLLISION ALARM: You can set CPA collision alarm.
and TCPA for the tracked target. Refer
to 2.12 Setting CPA/TCPA Alarm range.
Note that TCPA setting is available over
one-minute.

1-39
1.35 NAV INFORMATION Menu Notes:
and Navigation Data 1) Own ship position display requires an
Display input from an EPFS (electronics posi-
tion-fixing system) such as a GPS re-
Various navigation data can be displayed ceiver or a Loran-C receiver. Such an
on the radar screen. The data includes, EPFS should be of the type which pro-
depending on whether appropriate infor- vides output data in accordance with
mation is fed into the radar, own ship po- IEC 61162.
sition, cursor position, waypoint data, wind 2) When the sensor in use changes (ex.
data, water current data, depth data, wa- from GPS or DGPS), the name of sen-
ter temperature, rudder angle, rate of turn sor in the own ship call turns red, and
and navigation lane. EPFS label appears. To erase, press
Note that data not directly related with the the CANCEL key.
radar presentation is not available. Shown
below is a typical navigational data dis- Displaying External Waypoint
play.
The mark and data of external waypoint
1. Press the NAV MENU key on the plot- from an EPFS can be displayed by set-
ting keypad to show the NAV INFOR- ting NAV LINE menu as follows. To dis-
MATION menu. play the menu, press [NAV MENU] [7] in
2. Select navigation data input device and order.
press the ENTER key to confirm your
selection. [WAYPOINT]
3. Also, set other nav data parameters as
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1]
appropriate referring to the operation
2 WPT OFF/ON
flow shown on the next page.
4. Press the NAV MENU key to close the 4 WPT LINE OFF/ON
NAV INFORMATION menu. 5 WPT NO. OFF/ON

8 ARRIVAL ALARM* OFF/ON

0.00 NM

Note: When the waypoint is more than

5000 nm, from own ship, the data reads
">5000 nm".

1-40
 350 000 010
340 020
330 Amiiim LLUMlIl / / 030
320 040
310 050

300 060
Intended W12
070
290
course W11 Range and bearing
280 080
from origin mark
270 090 to cursor
260 W10 100 T
250
+4.7NM
110
Waypoints 123.5°R
240 120
2.2NM
230 130
29.5°R Range and bearing
220 140
210 150 to next waypoint
200
190 180 170
160 OWN PSN 35°20.370N
141°18.390E
+ PSN 35°20.370N Cursor position in
141°18.390E latitude and longitude
Own ship
position

When WPL and RTE sentences are input, the following display appears by selecting
NAV LINE ON.
When WPL and RTE sentences are input,
the following display appears by selecting
NAV LINE ON.

WA2
WA4

WA1
WA3

Working route

1-41
1.36 Radar Map By Cursor position;

A radar map is combination of map lines 1. Press the MARK key to display the EN-
and symbols whereby the user can de- TER MARK menu.
fine and input the navigation, route plan-
ning and monitoring data on the radar
equipment. Map lines are navigational [ENTER MARK]
facility whereby the observer can define MARK 01
lines to indicate channels or traffic sepa- 01. A
ration schemes. Also called nav lines, 02.
these line can be ground stabilized to stop 03.
them drifting. (Definition in Annex C of IEC 04. fi
60936-1 and IEC 60872-1) 05. fl
06. ©
07.
Marking radar map 08. X
09. o<
Select mark entry mode as follows. 10.
1. Press the NAV MENU key to display 11.
the NAV INFORMATION 1 menu. 12.
13.
2. Press [1] key to display the RADAR 14.
MAP menu. 15.
16. NAV LINE
17. COAST LINE
[RADAR MAP] 18. CONTOUR LINE
1 [NAV INFORMATION 1] 19. PROHIBITED AREAS
2 MAP 20.CABLE
OFF/ON 21.LINE CHANGE
3 NAV DATA POSN 22.MARK CANCEL*
4 ALIGN +CURSOR
OFF/ON *The mark cancel may be used when
5 MARK ENTRY MODE the new line is entered at the other position
CORSOR/L/L/OWN SHIP POSN after marking a line by using the same number mark.
6 ERASE MARK
OFF/AREA/ALL
2. Enter mark number to select desired
mark, followed by the ENTER key.
3. Press [2] key to twice to select ON, and
then press the ENTER key. MAP indi- 3. Place + cursor an appropriate point.
cation appears at the right-hand of the 4. Press the ENTER key.
screen.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 above. To enter
4. Press [5] key several times to select the same mark selected at step 2, sim-
the entry mode, cursor, L/L or own ship ply repeat step 3 and 4.
position.
6. To escape the mark entry mode, press
5. Press the ENTER key followed by the the MARK key.
NAV MENU key.
A radar map contain 1500 points of mark By L/L position entry mode
and line data.
1. Press the MARK key to display the EN-
Mark a radar map as follows. TER MARK menu. On L/L entry mode,
the latitude and longitude are appears.

1-42
 Other items
Latitude and longitude area

[ENTER MARK] 3. NAV DATA POSN:

0000.000 N/S
5-N 6-S Reset the chart alignment.
000.000 E/W
7-E 8-W 4. ALIGN + CURSOR
L

MARK 01 Select ON, plus the alignment rate to the

01. cursor data which is appeared at the lower
of the display.
2. Key in the latitude. If necessary, press
the following key. 6. ERASE MARK
[5] key; N, [6] key; S AREA; Erase all marks on the current ap-
3. Key in the longitude. If necessary, press pearing display.
the following key.
ALL; Erase all marks in the CPU.
[7] key; E, [8] key; W
4. Select mark.
5. Press the ENTER key. 1.37 Suppressing Second-trace
Echoes
By own ship position entry mode In certain situations, echoes from very dis-
1. Press the VIDEO PLOT key. tant targets may appear as false echoes
(second-trace echoes) on the screen. This
2. Press the MARK key. occurs when the return echo is received
3. Enter mark number. one transmission cycle later, that is, after
a next radar pulse has been transmitted.
4. Press the ENTER key.
To activate or deactivate the second-trace
Note: Waypoints used to make NAV lines, echo rejector:
as described on page 1-40, can be erased
on the NAV LINE menu. 1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the
plotting keypad to show the FUNC-
TIONS menu.
Chart alignment 2. Press the [8] key to select menu item 8
2ND ECHO REJ.
You can align the chart data and radar
image, by using the ALIGN key. 3. Further press the [8] key to activate
(ON) or deactivate (OFF) the second-
1. Press the ALIGN key. trace echo rejector.
2. Operate the trackball to align the chart 4. Press the ENTER key to conclude se-
on the radar. lection followed by the RADAR MENU
3. Press the ALIGN key to fix. key to close the FUNCTIONS menu.

1-43
1.38 Adjusting Relative The table below describes which menu
item adjusts the brilliance of which pic-
Brilliance Levels of ture element.
Screen Data
You can adjust relative brilliance levels of Menu Of which brilliance is
various marks and alphanumeric readouts item adjusted?
displayed on the screen by following the CHAR Alphanumeric readouts
steps shown below: MARKS Bearing scale, EBLs and
1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the VRMs
plotting keypad to show the FUNC- TRAILS Echo trails
TIONS menu. PANEL Operator control panel
2. Press the [9] key to show the BRIL- +CURSOR Trackball cursor (+)
LIANCE menu.
PLOT Plot symbols and marks for
3. Select a desired menu item by press- E-plot and optional Auto
ing the corresponding numeric key. As Plotter ARP-25
an example, press [4] if you want to HDG Heading line and stern marker
change the brilliance of echo trails. MARK (Stern marker displayed on
4. Further press the same numeric key R-type only.)
as you pressed in step 3 above to se- L/L GRID Lat/long grid lines generated
lect or highlight a desired brilliance by optional Auto Plotter
level. ARP-25
5. Press the ENTER key to conclude your CHART Chart generated by optional
selection followed by the RADAR Auto Plotter ARP-25
MENU key to close the FUNCTIONS
menu.
Note: You should adjust the entire CRT
Hit [RADAR MENU].
brilliance by operating the BRILL control
before adjusting relative brilliance levels
t on the BRILLIANCE menu.
[FUNCTIONS]
1 PULSEWIDTH 1/2
2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
4
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR*
1.39 Set and Drift
LOG/NAV*/MAN
6 SHIP'S SPEED
7 INDEX LINES NO.2 VRM/MAN (Set and Rate)
8 2ND ECHO REJ OFF/ON
9 BRILLIANCE
0 [SYSTEM SETTING 1] Set the direction in which a water current
flos, can be manually entered in 0.1 - de-
* R-type only
Hit [9]. gree steps. Drift, in another word Rate,
\' the speed of tide, can also be entered
[BRILLIANCE] manually in 0.1 knot steps.
1 [FUNCTION]
2 CHAR BRILL DIM/M1/M2/BRT
3 MARK BRILL DIM/M1/M2/BRT Set and drift corrections are benefcal for
4 TRAIL BRILL DIM/M1/M2/BRT increasing the accuracy of vectors and
5 PANEL DIMMER OFF/DIM/MBRT
6 +CURSOR BRILL OFF/DIM/MBRT target data. The correction is best made
7 PLOT BRILL OFF/DIM/MBRT
8 HDG MARK BRILL DIM/M/BRT in the head-up mode with true vector,
9 L/L GRID BRILL DIM/M1/M2/BRT
0 CHART BRILL DIM/M1/M2/BRT watching landmasses, or other
stationarytargets. If they have vectors, set
and drift values should be adjusted until
they lose vectors.

1-44
Note: Set and drift correction is available 4. Do the same to indicate ocean current
on selecting the water tracking mode only. graph and echo-sounding chart. Depth
scales can be selected among 10, 20,
Proceed as follows to enter set and drift 50, 100, 200 and 500 m on the NAV
(rate): INFORMATION 2 menu.
1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the 5. Press [0] key twice to show the NAV
plotting keyboard to show the FUNC- INFORMATION 3 menu.
TIONS 1 menu.
6. Press [2] key twice and press ENTER
2. Press the [8] key to select menu item key to select UTC.
8; SET, DRIFT.
3. Further press the [8] key to select OFF
or MAN option. Note: Wind data current data require the
respective sensors. The depth data re-
OFF: No correction against set and quires an adequate echo-sounding equip-
drift. ment. The echogram shows the last 30
MAN: Manual entry of set and drift data. minutes of depths along the ship's track.
Wind vector shows a direction from which
4. If OFF is selected, press the ENTER the wind blows in, relative to own ship
key. heading, and labeled T*. Wind velocity is
5. If you have selected MAN in step 3 a true wind speed as a result of compen-
above, the highlight cursor will advance sating for own ship's speed and orienta-
one line down requesting you to enter tion. Ocean current (tide) is the direction
SET xxx.x°. Enter the value of set in to which the current is flowing away from
degrees by hitting numeric keys with- os position, relative to north.
out omitting leading zeroes, if any, and
press the ENTER key. *T in this case means a true value mean-
while T denotes "relative to True North"
The highlight cursor will then advance in the case of EBLs and target ship vec-
to the next line DRIFT xx.x KT. Enter tors.
the value of drift in knots by hitting nu-
meric keys without omitting leading
zeroes, if any, and press the ENTER
key. Set and drift have the same effect
on own ship and all targets.
6. Press the RADAR MENU key to close
the menu.

1.40 Display of Ancillary

Information
Wind and tide data and depth sounding
data can be displayed in the text cell which
is normally used to indicate third target
ship data. Do as follow:
1. Press the NAV MENU key to show the
NAV INFORMATION 1 menu.
2. Press [8] key twice to set WIND DATA
ON and press the ENTER key.
3. Press [9] key twice to set WIND
GRAPH ON and press the ENTER key. 1-45
 0
OS heading Present depth
20

N 40
E /

Last 30 minutes 60
Current relative to north, of depth
full scale 10 kt. Vector will go off 80
if a positional data fails.
100m
-30 20 10 min
Wind direction relative to OS heading, full
W S scale 100 kt. Wind velocity is calculated Example of Depth graph
value to exclude the ship's orientation
and speed.
Example of Head-up mode

1.41 Alarms
This radar generates visual and audible alarms to alert you to certain events or sys-
tems failures, to provide enhanced safety and convenience. The table below summa-
rizes these alarms.
Problem Audible alarm Visual alarm To quit alarm status
HDG label reads ***.* and GYRO Change the presentation mode when the gyro
in red appears at the lower-right input has been restored. Align the on-screen
Gyro failure 2 beeps corner of the screen. Display is GYRO readout, if necessary. Then, press the
automatically switched to head-up CANCEL key to erase the message SET
mode within 1 min. HEADING.
Target alarm Press the GUARD ALARM key to silence the
Beeps Target flashes
(TAZ) alarm.
WATCH 0:00 Press the AUDIO OFF key to silence the alarm.
Watch alarm Beeps (Label "WATCH" turns red and THe label WATCH turns to normal video and the
time count freezes at 0:00.) timer is reset.
Own ship
***.* in own ship position field Make sure that own ship position data is fed from
lat/lon, None
***.* in own cursor position field external EPFS.
Cursor lat/lon
Message BRG SIGNAL MISSING
shows at screen bottom. No radar
System Make sure the Antenna switch in the turning
None echoes. SYSTEM FAILURE in red
failure compartment is ON.
at the lower left of the display
during Track Test.
Double beep
tone (Key Perfome correct key operation. Correct keystroke
Incorrect
beep not None is responded by a single beep tone provided that
Keystroke
available on KEY BEEP ON is selected in initial settings.
IMO-type.)
LOG **.* and the label LOG turns
red, if no log signal is input for 30 If the SDME has field, use the Manual Speed
LOG failure 2 beeps
sec while the ship speed has mode or other appropriate sensor.
been more than 5.0 kt.
AZIMUTH 1 beeps AZIMUTH in red
HDG 1 beeps HDG in red
When input signal corners in.
TRIG 1 beeps TRIG in red
VIDEO 1 beeps VIDEO in red

1-46
 2. OPERATION OF ARPA
2.1 General Trial maneuver: Predicted situation ap-
pears in 1 min after se-
The FAR-2805 series with ARP-25 board lected delay (1-60
provide the full ARPA (Automatic Radar minutes).
Plotting Aid) functions complying with IMO
A. 823 as well as complying with the radar
performance in MSC.64 (67) Annex 4. 2.2 Keys Used for ARPA
This chapter describes the operation of
the ARPA. For operation of normal radar, The Auto Plotter uses the keys on the plot-
refer to Chapter 1. ting keypad on the right side of the radar
screen and two keys on the control panel.
Below is a brief description of these keys.
Principal specifications
E-plot is inperable in ARPA mode. For E-
Acquisition and tracking plot reber to section 1.24 and 1.34.
CANCEL: Terminates tracking of a single
• Automatic acquisition of up to 20 tar- target specified by the trackball if the key
gets plus manual acquisition of 20 tar- is pressed with a hit-and-release action.
gets, or fully manual acquisition of 40 If the key is held depressed for about 3
targets between 0.1 and 32 nm (0.1 seconds, tracking of all targets is termi-
and 24 nm depending on initial setting) nated.
• Automatic tracking of all acquired tar-
ENTER: Registers menu options se-
gets between 0.1 and 32 nm (0.1 and
lected.
24 nm depending on initial setting)
VECTOR TRUE/REL: Selects true or rela-
Vectors tive presentation of target vectors.

Vector length: 30 sec, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 15, VECTOR TIME: Selects a vector length
30 min. of 30 sec, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 15 or 30 min.

Orientation: True velocity or relative TARGET DATA: Displays data on one of

velocity tracked targets selected by the trackball.

Motion trend: Displayed within 20 TARGET BASED SPEED: Own ship's

scans, full accuracy within speed is measured relative to a fixed tar-
60 sacans after acquisi- get.
tion. AUTO PLOT: Activates and deactivates
Past positions: Choice of 5 or 10 past the ARPA functions.
positions at intervals of 30 TRIAL: Shows consequences of own
sec, 1, 2, 3 or 6 min. ship's speed and course against all
Alarms: Visual and audible alarms tracked targets.
against targets violating LOST TARGET: Silences the lost target
CPA/TCPA limits, lost tar- aural alarm and erases the lost target
gets, targets crossing symbol.
guard zone (guard ring),
system failure and target HISTORY: Shows and erases past posi-
full status. tions of tracked targets.

2-1
ACQ (on control panel): Manually ac- 4. Select a desired menu item by press-
quires a target. ing the corresponding numeric key.
AUDIO OFF (on control panel): Silences 5. Select a menu option by pressing the
aural alarm. same numeric key as pressed in step 3
above. If there is more than one option
on the current menu item, you may
need to press the numeric key several
OFF ON times. Press it until the desired option
is highlighted. (Note that certain menu
VRM
items will prompt you to enter numeric
data or to define points on the radar
ACQ
screen with the trackball.)
6. Press the ENTER key to register set-
AUDIO tings.
OFF
7. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key
to close the menu.
Control panel
Hit [AUTO PLOT].

ORIGIN
MARK
VECTOR
TRUE/
REL
VECTOR
TIME
RADAR
MENU
O
1 2
A
3
1
Hit [E, AUTO PLOT MENU].
o
i
VECTOR
TARGET
TARGET
ORIGIN BASED
TRUE/
VECTOR
AUTO A
MARK
DATA DATA
REL PLOT
TIME 4 5 6
E,AUTO
PLOT
MENU [ARPA 1]
TRIAL
LOST
TARGET
HISTORY © 1 AUTO ACQ OFF/ON
7 8 9
2 AUTO ACQ AREA 3, 6 NM/SET
3 GUARD RING OFF/ON
CHART VIDEO NAV CANCEL
4 GUARD RING SET
MARK ENTER
ALIGN PLOT MENU – 9
5
6 CPA, TCPA SET CPA x.xNM
TCPA xx.xMIN

Plotting keypad 7 HISTORY POINTS 5/10/20*

8 HISTORY INTERVAL 30S/1/2/3/6MIN
9
0 [ARPA 2]
* 5/10 only on G-type
CRITERIA OF TRACKING
Hit [0].
A target measuring 800 m or more in the radial
or circumferential direction is regarded as a
landmass and not acquired or tracked. [ARPA 2]
Echoes smaller than 800 m are regarded as 1 [ARPA 1]
targets to be tracked. 2 TRIAL MANEUVER STATIC/DYNAMIC
3 MARK SIZE STANDARD/LARGE
4 CPA, TCPA DISPLAY OFF/ON
5 SET DRIFT OFF/MAN
SET xxx.x°
DRIFT xx.xKT
6 GUARD RING, ACQ NORTH/CRT
2.3 ARPA Menu Operation LINE STABILIZE
7 SPEED REF WT/BT
8 INPUT SIG CHECK
Various parameters for the Auto Plotter are 9 ARP TRACK TEST
0 INITIAL SETTING
set on the ARPA 1 and ARPA 2 menus. To
do this, follow the steps shown below: Hit [0].
\'
1. Press the AUTO PLOT key if the Auto [ ARPA ]
[INITIAL SETTING]
Plotter is not yet activated. Note that
the label ARPA appears in the upper- 1 [ARPA 2]
2 TARGET SELECT 0/1/2/3/4
right box on the screen. 3 TRACK RANGE 24/32NM
4 QV SELECT 0/1/2/3
5 TGT OUTPUT DATA OFF/REL/TRUE
2. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key 6
to show the ARPA 1 menu. 7
8
9 [ARPA PRESET]
3. Press the [0] key once if you wish to go
to the ARPA 2 menu.
2-2
2.4 Start-up Procedure 4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your
selection followed by the RADAR
Activating the ARPA MENU key to close the FUNCTIONS
menu. The ship's speed readout at the
To activate the ARPA: top of the screen shows own ship's
1. Adjust the A/C RAIN, A/C SEA and speed fed from the speed log preceded
GAIN controls for proper radar picture. by the label "LOG."

2. Press the AUTO PLOT key. The label 5. When the speed log is used, select
ARPA appears in the box at the upper- speed reference to either of SEA or
right on the screen. GND(ground) on the ARPA 2 menu.
Notes:
Entering own ship's speed 1) IMO Resolution A.823:1995 for ARPA
recommends that a speed log to be in-
The ARPA requires own ship's speed and terfaced with an ARPA should be ca-
heading data. Of these, the speed data pable of providing through-the-water
can be entered automatically from a speed data rather than over-the-ground
speed log, navaid, or manually through speed.
the numeric keys or based on a selected
reference target (such as a buoy or other 2) Be sure not to select LOG when a
prominent stationary target). speed log is not connected. If the log
signal is not provided, the ship speed
Automatic speed input readout at the top of the screen will be
blank. In the event of a log error, you
For speed log input: can continue plotting by entering a
manual speed.
1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the
3) If a log signal interval becomes more
plotting keypad to show the FUNC-
then 30 seconds with the ship's speed
TIONS menu.
5KT or more, the radar regards the
FUNCTION KEY 1
speed log is in a trouble and LOG FAIL
1. SYSTEM SETTNG 1
2. FUNCTION
appears, reading xx-x KT. For R-type,
(FUNC1, RIVER, BUOY, SHIP, SHORT,
LONG, CRUISING, HARBOR, COAST,
if no speed input is present for 3 min-
OCEAN, ROUGH SEA)
3. INT REJECT (OFF, 1, 2, 3) utes at below 0.1KT, the radar regards
4. ECHO STRETCH (OFF, 1, 2)
5. ECHO AVERAGE (OFF, 1, 2, 3) the log is in failure.
6. A/C AUTO (OFF, ON)
7. FUNC 1 PULSE WD 1. FUNCTION KEY 1, 2 or 3
8. NOISE REJ (OFF, ON) 2. 0.5 NM (S1, S2)

FUNCTION KEY 2, 3
3. 0.75 NM (S1, S2)
4. 1.5 NM (S1, S2, M1)
Manual speed input
1. SYSTEM SETTING 1 5. 3 NM (S1, S2, M1)
2. FUNC KEY 2 or 3 (PICTURE/OPERATION) 6. 6 NM (M1, M2, L)
3. FUNCTION
(FUNC2(3), RIVER, BUOY, SHIP, SHORT,
7. 12-24 NM (M2, L)
To manually enter the ship's speed with
LONG, CRUISING, HARBOR, COAST,
OCEAN, ROUGH SEA)
the numeric keys:
4. INT REJECT (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
5. ECHO STRETCH (OFF, 1, 2)
6. ECHO AVERAGE (OFF, 1, 2, 3) 1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the
7. A/C AUTO (OFF, ON)
8. FUNC 2(3) PULSE WD
9. NOISE REJ (OFF, ON)
plotting keypad to show the FUNC-
FUNCTION KEY 4
TIONS menu.
1. SYSTEM SETTING 1
2. FUNC KEY 4 (OPERATION, WATCH ALARM)
3. ALARM INTERVAL (6, 10, 12, 15, 20 MIN)
1. SYSTEM SETTING 1
2. FUNC KEY 2 (3) (PICTURE/OPERATION)
2. Press the key [6] to select menu item
3. OPERATION
(HU, HU TB, CU, NU, TM, TRAIL; CU, TM RESET;
6SHIP'S SPEED.
OFF CENTER, IDX LINES, CURSOR OFFSET,
ECHO STRETCH1, ECHO STRETCH2, PLS WD1,
PLS WD2, ECHO AVG1, ECHO AVG2, ECHO AVG3, 3. Press the key [6] to select (or highlight)
ECHO COLOR, TRAIL BRILL, PANEL BRILL,
CHAR BRILL, NOISE REJ, TARGET DATA, CANCEL) MAN option.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your
2. Press the [6] key to select menu item selection. At this point, "MAN = xx.x KT"
6SHIP'S SPEED. appears at the bottom of the FUNC-
3. Press the [6] key to select (or highlight) TIONS menu.
LOG option.
2-3
5. Enter the ship speed by hitting corre- Notes:
sponding numeric keys followed by the
ENTER key without omitting leading 1) When the reference target is lost or
zeroes, if any. As an example, if the ship goes out of the acquisition range, the
speed is 8 knots, press [0] [8] [ENTER]. reference target mark blinks and the
For 4.5 knots, [0] [4] [5] [ENTER]. speed reads "xx.x." Select a different
reference target in this case.
6. Press the RADAR MENU key to close
the FUNCTIONS menu. The ship 2) When all targets are deleted, the refer-
speed readout at the screen top shows ence target mark is also deleted and
own ship's speed you entered pre- the target-based speed becomes in-
ceded by the label "MANU." valid. The speed is indicated in KTBT
where BT means Bottom Track (speed
over ground).
Target-based speed
3) The vector of the reference target can
The use of target-based speed is recom- be displayed by menu operation (Auto
mended when: Plot 1 menu).
• The speed log is not operating prop-
Canceling target-based speed
erly or not connected to the radar.
• The vessel has no device which can To cancel the target-based speed, just
measure ship's leeward movement press the TARGET BASED SPEED key.
(doppler sonar, speed log, etc.) though The speed is shown by LOG, NAV* or
leeward movement can not be disre- MANUAL as selected previously. (NAV
garded. only on R-type)
If you select target-based speed, the Auto
Plotter calculates own ship's speed rela- Deactivating the ARPA
tive to a fixed reference target.
To deactivate the ARPA, just press the
Note: When the target-based speed is AUTO PLOT key. Target plotting symbols
adopted, automatically or manually en- and the on-screen label ARPA will disap-
tered ship's speed is disregarded. pear.

To establish target-based speed: Note: Even when the ARPA is turned off,
target tracking still goes on until the radar
1. Select a small fixed island or any radar is turned off. (For G-type, target tracking
prominent point located at 0.2 to 24 nm goes off at STBY.)
from own ship.
2. Place the cursor (+) on the target by
operating the trackball.
2.5 Automatic Acquisition
3. Press the TARGET BASED SPEED
key. The ARPA can acquire up to 40 targets
The reference target mark (see below) (20 automatically and 20 manually or all
appears at the cursor position and the 40 manually. If AUTO ACQ is selected af-
own ship data label changes from ter more than 20 targets have been manu-
"LOG," "NAV" or "MANU" to "REF." ally acquired, only the remaining capacity
Note that it takes one minute before a of targets can be automatically acquired.
new speed is displayed. For example, when 30 targets have been
acquired manually, then the ARPA is
R Reference target mark switched to AUTO ACQ. Only 10 targets
can be acquired automatically. A target just
acquired automatically is marked with a
broken square and a vector appears about
2-4
one minute after acquisition indicating the Setting auto acquisition areas
target's motion trend. Three minutes af-
ter acquisition, the initial tracking stage is Instead of limit lines, auto acquisition ar-
finished and the target becomes ready for eas are provided in the system. There are
stable tracking. At this point, the broken two setting methods:
square mark changes to a solid circle. 3, 6NM: Two predefined auto acquisition
(Targets automatically acquired are dis- areas; one between 3.0 and 3.5 nm and
tinguished from those acquired manually, the other between 5.5 and 6.0 nm.
displayed by bold symbol.)
SET: Two sector-shaped or full-circle auto
acquisition areas set by using the trackball.
Enabling and disabling auto
acquisition To set 3 & 6 NM auto acquisition ar-
1. Press the E, AUTO PLOT key if the eas
ARPA is not yet activated. Note that the
label ARPA appears in the box at the To activate two predefined auto acquisi-
upper-right on the screen. tion areas:
1. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key
Hit [E, AUTO PLOT MENU].
to show the ARPA 1 menu.

[ARPA1]
2. Press the [2] key to select menu item
1 AUTO ACQ OFF/ON 2AUT O ACQ AREA.
2 AUTO ACQ AREA 6 NM/SET
3
4
GUARD RING
GUARD RING SET
OFF/ON 3. Further press the [2] key to select (or
5 highlight) menu option 3, 6NM.
6 CPA, TCPA SET CPA 00.0NM
TCPA 00.0MIN
7 HISTORY POINTS 5/10/20* 4. Press the ENTER key to confirm your
8 HISTORY INTERVAL 30S/1/3/3/6MIN
0 [ARPA 2] selection followed by the E, AUTO
PLOT MENU key to close the ARPA 1
*5/10 only on IMO-type menu.

2. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key The illustration below shows how the auto
to show the ARPA 1 menu. acquisition areas are displayed on the
screen. Up to 20* targets within the auto
3. Press the [1] key to select menu item acquisition areas are acquired automati-
1AUT O ACQ. cally.
4. Further press the [1] key to select (or *If 30 targets have already been acquired
highlight) ON (enable auto acquisition) manually in the MAN ACQ mode (AUTO
or OFF (disable auto acquisition) as OFF on ARPA 1 menu), only 10 more tar-
appropriate. gets can be acquired automatically.
5. Press the ENTER key to conclude your
selection followed by the E, AUTO
PLOT MENU key to close the AUTO
PLOT 1 menu. Note that the label
AUTO+MAN is displayed in the box at
the upper-right on the screen when
auto acquisition is enabled; MAN when
3-3.5 nm 5.5-6 nm
auto acquisition is disabled.
Note: When the ARPA has acquired 20
targets automatically, the message AUTO
TARGET FULL is displayed in the box at
the right-hand side of screen.
Predefined auto acquisition areas

2-5
To set auto acquisition areas with 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 above if you want
trackball to set another auto acquisition area with
the trackball.
To set auto acquisition areas with
9. Press the [1] key followed by the E,
trackball: AUTO PLOT MENU key to close the
1. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key ARPA 1 menu.
to show the ARPA 1 menu.
An auto acquisition area like the example
2. Press the [2] key to select menu item shown above appears on the display.
2AUT O ACQ AREA. Note that each auto acquisition area has
a fixed radial extension (width) of 0.5 nm.
3. Further press the [2] key to select (or
highlight) SET option. Note that the auto acquisition areas are
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your preserved in an internal memory of the
selection. At this point the AUTO ACQ ARPA even when auto acquisition is dis-
SETTING menu is displayed at the abled or the ARPA is turned off.
screen bottom.
[AUTO ACQ SETTING]
Terminating tracking of targets
1 [AUTO PLOT 1]
2 1/2 When the ARPA has acquired 20 targets
automatically, the message AUTO TAR-
GET FULL is displayed in the box at right-
5. Press the [2] key to select menu item hand side of the screen and no more auto
21/2 and press the ENTER key . Then, acquisition occurs unless targets are lost.
you will see the message as shown You may find this message before you set
below: an auto acquisition area. Should this hap-
pen, cancel tracking of less important tar-
[AUTO ACQ SETTING]
gets or perform manual acquisition.
1 [AUTO PLOT 1]
2 1/2

SET LEFT/RIGHT BOUNDARY

Individual targets
CANCEL PREVIOUS AREA: CANCEL KEY
Place the cursor (+) on a target to cancel
6. Place the cursor at the outer counter- tracking by operating the trackball. Press
clockwise corner of the area (point A) the CANCEL key.
and press the ENTER key.
All targets
7. Place the cursor at the clockwise edge
of the area (point B) and press the Press and hold the CANCEL key down
ENTER key. more than 3 seconds. In the automatic
acquisition mode, acquisition begins
0.5 nm again.
A
B
Discrimination between
landmass and true targets
Automatic acquisition area set by
trackball A target is recognized as a landmass and
thus not acquired if it is 800 m or more in
Note: If you wish to create an auto range or bearing direction.
acquisition area having a 360-degree
coverage around own ship, set point B
in almost the same direction (approx.
±3°) as point A and press the ENTER
key.

2-6
2.6 Manual Acquisition
CAUTION
In auto acquisition mode (AUTO ACQ
Target Swap
ON), up to 20 targets can be manually
acquired in addition to 20 auto acquired When a tracked target nears another
targets. When auto acquisition is disabled tracked target, the targets may be
(AUTO ACQ OFF), up to 40 targets can "swapped." When two targets acquired
be manually acquired and automatically either auomatically or manually come
tracked. close to each other, one of the two may
become a "lost target." Should this happen
To manually acquire a target: manual re-acquisition of the "lost target"
1. Place the cursor (+) on a target of in- may be required after the two targets have
separated.
terest by operating the trackball.
2. Press the ACQ key on the control
panel. The selected plot symbol is
marked at the cursor position. 2.7 Changing Plot Symbol
Note that the plot symbol is drawn by bro- Size
ken lines during the initial tracking stage.
A vector appears in about one minute af- Press a desired plot symbol key, and the
ter acquisition indicating the target's mo- symbol is enlarged for about 7 seconds.
tion trend. If the target is consistently
You may also choose plot symbol size.
detected for three minutes, the plot sym-
To choose a large or standard size for all
bol changes to a solid mark. If acquisition
plot symbols:
fails, the target plot symbol blinks and dis-
appears shortly. 1. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key
on the plotting keypad followed by the
keys [0] to show the ARPA 2 menu.
r i
”
(a) Immediately after acquisition—
L .J Plot symbol shown in broken lines. 2. Press the [3] key to select 3MARK
SIZE.
(b) 20 scans after acquisition—
Vector appears to show a trend of 3. Further press the [3] key to select (or
movement. highlight) STANDARD or LARGE as
appropriate.
(c) 60 scans after acquisition—
Plot symbol shown in solid lines 4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your
indicating stable tracking. selection followed by the E, AUTO
PLOT MENU key to close the ARPA 2
Notes: menu.
1) For successful acquisition, the target
to be acquired should be within 0.1 to
32 nm from own ship and not obscured
by sea or rain clutter.
2) When you have acquired 40 targets
manually, the message MAN TARGET
FULL is displayed at the screen bot-
tom. Cancel tracking of non-threaten-
ing targets if you wish to acquire
additional targets manually.
(See"T erminating tracking of acquired
targets" on page 2-6.)

2-7
ARPA symbols
The symbols used in this equipment are designed to comply with Annex E (ARPA
Video Symbols) to IEC 872, Operational Requirements for ARPA.
Item Symbol Status Remarks
Automatically Initial stage Broken square around an echo to
acquired targets indicate the target under acquisition
and initial stage of tracking, before
EPVS symbol NO. 3 steady-state tracking.
Between 20 and 60 scans of antenna
after acquisition (vector still unreliable)
EPVS symbol NO. 3
Steady tracking Solid circle with vector indicating
steady state tracking (60 scans after
EPVS symbol NO. 4a acquisition)
CPA alarm Plot symbol changes to an equilateral
triangle flashing to indicate the target is
predicted to come into CPA or TCPA.
(flashing) EPVS symbol NO. 8

CPA alarm Flashing stops after CPA/TCPA alarm

acknowledge is acknowledged.
EPVS symbol NO. 8

Lost target Lost target is indicated by flashing

diamond symbol. The diamond is
EPVS symbol NO. 9 formed from two equal triangles.
(flashing)
Manually Initial stage Plot symbol selected for a target
acquired targets acquired manually is shown in bold
EPVS symbol NO. 3 broken lines.
Bold broken square for 20 - 60 scans of
EPVS symbol NO. 3 antenna after acquisition.

Steady tracking Manual plot symbol in a bold solid

EPVS symbol NO. 4a circle (60 scans after acquisition)

CPA alarm Plot symbol changes to an equilateral

(collision course) triangle flashing if a target is predicted
to come into the preset CPA or TCPA.
(flashing) EPVS symbol NO. 8

Flashing stops after CPA/TCPA alarm

EPVS symbol NO. 8 is acknowledged.
Lost target Lost target is indicated by flashing
diamond symbol. The diamond is
formed from two equal triangles (one
(flashing) EPVS symbol NO. 9 apex up and the other apex down).

2-8
ARPA symbols (continued)
Item Symbol Status Remarks
Guard zone On target passing Plot symbol changes to an equilateral
through operator- triangle apex down, flashing together
set guard zone with vector if target entering guard
(flashing) EPVS symbol NO. 7 zone (guard ring).

Automatic 5.5-6.0 nm, 3-3.5 Sector or full circle as selected by the

acquisition area nm or anywhere operator.

EPVS symbol NO. 2

Target selected 1 On selected Target data (range, bearing, course,

for data readout target speed, CPA and TCPA).
EPVS symbol NO. 12

Reference target I 1 On reference Used to calculate own ship’s over-

I
I
I I
R target the-ground speed (target-based speed)
(In 60 scans, for ground stabilization.
R
change to )
Trial maneuver T Bottom center Appears during execution of a trial
maneuver.
(flashing) EPVS symbol NO. 10
Auto Plotter Bottom center
XX Appears during execution of a
performance performance test (Track Test).
test (flashing) EPVS symbol NO. 11A

Item Symbol Status Remarks

Non-ARPA These are non-ARPA symbols but only
symbols for E-prot. Not available in the ARPA
mode.

2-9
2.8 Adjusting Brilliance of "R") to own ship in accordance with the
true/relative vector setting. In north-up,
Plot Marks course-up and true motion modes, the
1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the target data field always displays true bear-
plotting keypad to show the FUNC- ing, true course and speed over the
TIONS menu. ground.

2. Press the [9] key to show the BRIL- Place the cursor on a desired target and
LIANCE menu. press the TARGET DATA key on the plot-
ting keypad. Data on the selected target
3. Press the [7] key to select 7 PLOT is displayed at the upper-right corner of
BRILL. the screen. A typical target data display
4. Further press the [7] key to select (or is shown in the illustration below.
highlight) a desired brilliance level. RNG/BRG (Range/Bearing): Range and
5. Press the ENTER key to confirm your bearing from own ship to the selected tar-
selection followed by the RADAR get with suffix "T" (True) or "R" (Relative).
MENU key to close the FUNCTION
CSE/SPD (Course/Speed): Course and
menu.
speed are displayed for the selected tar-
Note: Refer to paragraph 1.37 for the get with suffix "T" (True) or "R" (relative).
BRILLIANCE menu screen.
CPA/TCPA: CPA(Closest Point of Ap-
proach) is the closest range a target will
approach to own ship. TCPA is the time
2.9 Displaying Target Data to CPA. Both CPA and TCPA are auto-
matically calculated. When a target ship
The Auto Plotter calculates motion trends has passed clear of own ship, CPA is pre-
(range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and fixed with an asterisk such as,
TCPA) of all plotted targets. CPA*1.5NM. TCPA is counted to 99.9 min
and beyond this, it is indicate as
In head-up and head-up true bearing TCPA>*99.9MIN.
modes, target bearing, course and speed
shown in the upper-right target data field BCR/BCT: Bow crossing range is a range
become true (suffix "T") or relative (suffix of a target which will pass dead ahead of
own ship at a calculated distance. BCT is
the time when BCR occures.

350 000 010

340 020

320
330 030 RNG 3.4 NM RNG: Range from own ship
040
BRG 25.5°R to target
310 050
CSE 264.0°R BRG: Bearing from own ship
300 Guard 060
ring SPD 12.3 KT to target (true or relative)
290 070

280 080
CPA 2.9NM TCPA 12.2MIN
BCR 8.7NM BCT20MIN
CSE: Course of target
Target on Target in (true or relative)
270 090
collision course guard ring SPD: Speed of target
260 100
Auto acqui- CPA: CPA between own ship and
250 sition area 110
target
240 120 TCPA: TCPA between own ship
230 130
and target
220 140
210
WJTmjTTTtlTTV 150 BCR: Bow Cross Range
Manually 200 160 Automatically
acquired
190 180 170
acquired BCT: Bow Cross Time
target target

2-10
2.10 Mode and Length of Relative vector
Vectors
With relative vectors the radar display will
True or relative vector look like (b).

Target vectors can be displayed relative Relative vectors on targets which are not
to own ship's heading (relative) or with moving over the ground such as land,
reference to the north (true). navigational marks and ships at anchor
will represent the reciprocal of own ship’s
Press the VECTOR TRUE/REL key to ground track. A target of which vector ex-
select true or relative vectors. This fea- tension passes through own ship is on the
ture is available in all presentation modes collision course. (Dotted lines in the fig-
(gyrocompass must be working correctly). ure are for explanation only.)
The current vector mode is indicated at
the upper-right corner of the screen.
ORIGIN VECTOR VECTOR
TRUE/
MARK REL TIME
True vector
TARGET
With true vectors the radar display will look TARGET
BASED
AUTO
DATA DATA PLOT
like the one shown below in head-up
mode.
LOST
In the true motion mode, all fixed targets TRIAL HISTORY
TARGET
such as land, navigational marks and
ships at anchor remain stationary on the
radar screen with vector length zero. But
in the presence of wind and/or current, Vector time
true vectors appear on fixed targets rep-
resenting the reciprocal of set and drift Vector time (or the length of vectors) can
affecting own ship unless set and drift be set to 30 seconds, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12, 15 or
values are properly entered (see para- 30 minutes and the selected vector time
graph 2.12). is indicated at the upper-right corner of
the screen.

A Press the VECTOR TIME key to select

desired vector time. The vector tip shows
an estimated position of the target after
Buoy the selected vector time elapses. It can
Target on colli-
sion course
be valuable to extend the vector length to
evaluate the risk of collision with any tar-
Own ship
B
G
get.

(a) True vectors in head-up mode 2.11 Past Position Display

The ARPA displays equally time-spaced
dots marking the past positions of any
A
targets being tracked.
Buoy A new dot is added every minute (or at
Target on colli-
sion course preset time intervals) until the preset num-
ber is reached. If a target changes its
Own ship
B speed, the spacing will be uneven. If it
changes the course, its plotted course will
not be a straight line.
2-11
(b) Relative vectors in head-up mode
Displaying and erasing past 6. Further press the [8] key to select a de-
positions sired past position plot interval (30 sec-
onds, 1, 2, 3 or 6 minutes).
To display past positions, press the
7. Press the ENTER key to conclude your
HISTORY key to display past positions of selection.
targets being tracked. The label HISTORY
appears at the upper-right corner of the 8. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key
screen. to close the menu.

VECTOR
ORIGIN
MARK
TRUE/
VECTOR
TIME
2.12 Setting CPA/TCPA Alarm
REL
Ranges
TARGET TARGET AUTO
DATA
BASED
DATA PLOT The ARPA continuously monitors the pre-
dicted range at the Closest Point of Ap-
proach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA
LOST
TRIAL
TARGET
HISTORY (TCPA) of each tracked target to own ship.
V When the predicted CPA of any target be-
comes smaller than a preset CPA alarm
To erase past positions, press the HIS- range and its predicted TCPA less than a
TORY key again. preset TCPA alarm limit, the ARPA re-
leases an aural alarm and displays the
Selecting the number of dots and warning label COLLISION on the screen.
In addition, the ARPA symbol changes to
past position plot intervals
a triangle and flashes together with its vec-
1. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key tor.
on the plotting keyboard to show the
Provided that this feature is used correctly,
ARPA 1 menu.
it will help prevent the risk of collision by
Hit [E, AUTO PLOT MENU].
alerting you to threatening targets. It is
important that GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN
t and other radar controls are properly ad-
[ARPA1] justed.
1 AUTO ACQ OFF/ON
2 AUTO ACQ AREA 6 NM/SET
3 GUARD RING OFF/ON CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up
4 GUARD RING SET
5 properly taking into consideration the size,
6 CPA, TCPA SET CPA 00.0NM tonnage, speed, turning performance and
TCPA 00.0MIN
7 HISTORY POINTS 5/10/20* other characteristics of own ship.
8 HISTORY INTERVAL 30S/1/3/3/6MIN
0 [ARPA 2]

*5/10 only on IMO-type CAUTION

2. Press the [7] key to select menu item CPA/TCPA Alarm
7HIST ORY POINTS. The CPA/TCPA alarm feature should never
3. Further press the [7] key to select a de- be relied upon as the sole means for detect-
sired number of past positions (5, 10, ing the risk of collision.
20, 30, 100, 150 or 200). The IMO-type The navigator is not relieved of the respon-
has the selection of only 5 or 10. sibility to keep visual lookout for avoiding
collisions, whether or not the radar or other
4. Press the ENTER key to confirm your plotting aid is in use.
selection.
5. Press the [8] key to select menu item
8HIST ORY INTERVAL.
2-12
To set the CPA/TCPA alarm ranges: 2.13 Setting a Guard Zone
1. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key
on the plotting keypad to show the When a target transits the operator-set
ARPA 1 menu. guard zone, the buzzer sounds and the
indication GUARD RING appears at the
2. Press the [6] key to select menu item screen bottom. The target causing the
6CP A, TCPA SET. At this point, a high- warning is clearly indicated with an in-
light cursor appears at the "CPA x.xNM" verted flashing triangle.
field.
3. Enter the CPA alarm range in nautical
miles (max 9.9 min) without omitting CAUTION
leading zeroes, if any, and press the Guard Zone
ENTER key. The highlight cursor now
moves to the "TCPA xx.xMIN" field. The Guard Zone (Guard Ring) should never
be relied upon as a sole means for detecting
4. Enter the TCPA alarm limit in minutes the risk ofcollision. The navigator is not
(max. 99.0 min) without omitting lead- relieved of the responsibility to keep a visual
ing zeroes, if any, and press the EN- lookout foravoiding collisions, whether or
TER key. not the radar or other plotting aid is in use.
5. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key
to close the menu.
Activating the guard zone
Silencing CPA/TCPA aural alarm
No.1 Guard Zone is available between 3
Press the AUDIO OFF key to acknowl- and 6 nm with a fixed range depth of 0.5
edge and silence the CPA/TCPA aural nm. No.2 GZ may be set anywhere when
alarm. No.1 GZ is valid.
The warning label COLLISION and the To set and activate the guard zone:
flashing of the triangle plot symbol and
1. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key
vector remain on the screen until the dan-
on the plotting keyboard to show the
gerous situation is gone or you intention-
ARPA 1 menu.
ally terminate tracking of the target by
using the CANCEL key. 2. Press the [3] key to select menu item
3GUARD RING.
3. Further press the [3] key to select (or
highlight) ON to activate the guard
zone.
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your
selection.
5. Press the [4] key to select menu item
4GUARD RING SET . At this point the
GUARD SETTING menu is displayed
at the screen bottom.
[GUARD SETTING]

1 [AUTO PLOT 1]
2 1/2

SET LEFT/RIGHT BOUNDARY

CANCEL PREVIOUS AREA: CANCEL KEY

6. Press the [2] key and ENTER key. ([2]

[2] [ENTER] when setting the no.2 ring.)
2-13
7. Referring to figure below, place the Silencing the guard zone (guard
cursor at the outer left corner of the ring) audible alarm
area (point A) and press the ENTER
key. Press the AUDIO OFF key to acknowl-
8. Place the cursor at the right edge of edge and silence the guard zone audible
alarm.
the area (point B) and press the EN-
TER key.
Note: If you wish to create a guard 2.14 Operational Warnings
zone having a 360-degree coverage
around own ship, set point B in almost There are six main situations which cause
the same direction (approx. ±3°) as the Auto Plotter to trigger visual and au-
point A and press the ENTER key.
ral alarms:
9. Press the [1] key followed by the E, • CPA/TCPA alarm
AUTO PLOT MENU key to close the • Guard zone alarm
ARPA 1 menu. • Lost target alarm
• Target full alarm for manual acquisition
The guard zone as an example shown be-
• Target full alarm for automatic acquisi-
low appears on the display. Note that the
tion
guard zone has a fixed radial extension
• System failures
(width) of 0.5 nm. The label GZ is dis-
played in the box at the upper-right on the The audible alarm can be set to OFF
screen when guard zone is enabled. through the AUTO PLOT 2 menu.

CPA/TCPA alarm
A 0.5nm Visual and aural alarms are generated
B when the predicted CPA and TCPA of any
target become less than their preset lim-
Target in guard zone its. Press the AUDIO OFF key to acknowl-
is marked by inverted edge and silence the CPA/TCPA aural
flashing triangle.
alarm.

Guard zone (guard ring) alarm

Visual and audible alarms are generated
Deactivating the guard zone when a target transits the operator-set
(guard ring) guard zone. Press the AUDIO OFF key
to acknowledge and silence the guard
1. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key zone audible alarm. (Refer to paragraph
on the plotting keyboard to show the 2.14 Setting a Guard Zone for further in-
ARPA 1 menu. formation.)
2. Press the [3] key to select menu item
3GUARD RING. Lost target alarm
3. Further press the [3] key to select (or
highlight) OFF to deactivate the guard When the system detects a loss of a
zone. tracked target, the target symbol becomes
a flashing diamond ($) and the label
4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your "LOST" appears at the screen bottom. At
selection followed by the E, AUTO the same time, an aural alarm is produced
PLOT MENU key to close the ARPA 1 for one second.
menu.
Press the LOST TARGET key to acknowl-
edge the lost target alarm. Then, the lost
2-14
target mark disappears.
Target full alarm 2.15 Trial Maneuver
When the memory becomes full, the Trial simulates the effect on all tracked
memory full status is indicated and the targets against own ship's maneuver with-
relevant indication appears on the screen out interrupting the updating of target in-
and a short beep sounds. formation.
There are two types of trial maneuvers:
Manually acquired targets static and dynamic.
The indication "MAN TARGET FULL" ap-
pears at the screen bottom and a short Dynamic trial maneuver
beep tone sounds when the number of
manually acquired targets reaches 20 or A dynamic trial maneuver displays pre-
40 depending on whether auto acquisi- dicted positions of the tracked targets and
tion is activated or not. own ship. You enter own ship's intended
speed and course with a certain "delay
time." Assuming that all tracked targets
Automatically acquired targets maintain their present speeds and
The indication "AUTO TARGET FULL" ap- courses, the targets' and own ship's fu-
pears at the screen bottom and a short ture movements are simulated in one-sec-
beep tone sounds when the number of ond increments indicating their predicted
automatically acquired targets reaches positions in one-minute intervals as illus-
20. trated below.
The delay time represents the time lag
System failure alarm from the present time to the time when
own ship will actually start to change her
When the ARP board receives no signal speed and/or course. You should there-
input from the radar or external equip- fore take into consideration own ship's
ment, the screen shows both "SYSTEM maneuvering characteristics such as rud-
FAIL" associated with an indication de- der delay, turning delay and acceleration
noting offending equipment, also releas- delay. This is particularly important on
ing an aural alarm. The missing signals large vessels. How much the delay is set
are denoted as shown below: the situation starts immediately and ends
in a minute.
In the example shown below, own ship
Missing Signal Indication
will advance straight ahead (even after a
maneuver) for a delay time of 5 minutes
*Speed log signal LOG
and then alters speed and course until
*Gyrocompass GYRO operator-specified intended speed and
course are achieved (position OS7 in this
Trigger signal from radar T example).
Video from radar V
*Bearing signal from B
radar antenna
*Heading pulses from H
radar antenna
*The alarm is available with or without
ARPA.

2-15
 [ARPA 2]
B8 1 [ARPA 1]
B7 2 TRIAL MANEUVER STATIC/DYNAMIC
B6
B5 3 MARK SIZE STANDARD/LARGE
B4
B3 4 CPA, TCPA DISPLAY OFF/ON
B2
OS8 B1 5 SET DRIFT OFF/MAN
B0
A8 OS7 SET xxx.x°
OS6 DRIFT xx.xKT
A7
OS5 B 6 GUARD RING, ACQ NORTH/CRT
OS4 LINE STABILIZE
A6 OS3 7 SPEED REF WT/BT
Delay time = 5 min. 8 INPUT SIG CHECK
OS2
A5 9 ARP TRACK TEST
OS1 0 INITIAL SETTING
OS0
A4

A3
Present own
2. Press the [2] key to select 2TRIAL
A2 ship position MODE.
A1 3. Further press the [2] key to select (or
A0 A highlight) STATIC or DYNAMIC trial
maneuver option as appropriate.
T 4. Press the ENTER key to conclude your
selection followed by the E, AUTO
Dynamic trial maneuver PLOT MENU key to close the ARPA 2
menu.
Note that once a dynamic trial maneuver 5. Press the VECTOR TRUE/REL key to
is initiated, you cannot alter own ship's select true or relative vector.
trial speed, course or delay time until the
trial maneuver is terminated. ORIGIN VECTOR VECTOR
TRUE/
MARK REL TIME

Static trial maneuver

TARGET TARGET AUTO
BASED
A static trial maneuver displays only the DATA DATA PLOT
final situation of the simulation. If you en-
ter the same trial speed, course and de- LOST
TRIAL HISTORY
lay time under the same situation as in TARGET
the aforementioned example of dynamic
trial maneuver, the screen will instantly 6. Press the TRIAL key. The TRIAL DATA
show position OS7 for own ship, position SETTING menu appears at the screen
A7 for target A and position B7 for target bottom associated with the current own
B, omitting the intermediate positions. ship's speed and course readouts.
Thus, the static trial maneuver will be con-
venient when you wish to know the ma- TRIAL DATA SETTING
neuver result immediately. [DYNAMIC MODE]:

SPEED (VRM) 15.0KT

Note: For accurate simulation of ship COURSE (EBL) 53.6°
movements in a trial maneuver, own ship's DELAY TIME xx.x MIN
characteristics such as acceleration and
turning performance should be properly Note: The second line reads [STATIC
set in initial settings at the time of instal- MODE] in the event of a static trial
lation. maneuver.

To perform a trial maneuver: 7. Enter own ship's intended speed,

course and delay time in the following
1. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key manner:
on the plotting keypad followed by the
[0] key to show the ARPA 2 menu. Speed: Set with the VRM control.
Course: Set with the EBL control.

2-16
 Delay time:Enter in minutes by hitting 6. It takes approximately three minutes
numeral keys. This is the for all vectors to be displayed. The track
time after which own ship test display does not need echo sig-
takes a new situation, not nal, gyro nor speed log input. Seven
the time the simulation targets having various speeds and
begins. Change the delay courses, as shown in the table on the
time according to own next page, are simulated automatically.
ship loading condition,
etc. 7. The track test continues for 5 minutes
and then repeats.
8. Press the TRIAL key again to start a
trial maneuver. To terminate the track test, press the ST-
BY/TX key twice and the ST-BY display
Trial maneuver takes place in three min- will appear.
utes with the letter "T" displayed at the
bottom of the screen. If any tracked tar- CPA and TCPA shown below are initial
get is predicted to be on a collision course values.
with own ship (that is, the target ship
Speed CPA TCPA
comes within preset CPA/TCPA limits), the Target Course
(kt) (nm) (min)
target plot symbol changes to a triangle
Target A 90.0˚ T 10.0 1.0 10.4
(∆) and flashes. If this happens, change
own ship's trial speed, course or delay Target B 0.0˚ T 0.0 4.0 *
time to obtain a safe maneuver. The trial Target C 180.0˚ T 10.0 1.7 28.2
maneuver is automatically terminated and Target D 216.5˚ T 23.8 0.9 15.0
the normal radar picture is restored three
Target E 273.5˚ T 14.2 6.0 22.5
minutes later.
Target F 180.0˚ T 20.0 0.0 30.0
Target G 24.6˚ T 15.6 4.0 43.6
Terminating trial maneuver
* Invalid value
Press the TRIAL key again at any time.
F

+
2.16 ARPA Track Test E
C
Test program is provided for assessing D
ARPA overall performance. Note that nor- A
mal operation is interrupted and the label
B
"XX" is displayed at the bottom of the
screen during this test. The Test may be
terminated at any moment.
To execute the ARPA track test:
XX
1. Select north-up mode presentation on G
the 12 nm range.
Note: Alphabets mark targets in the
2. Enter manual speed of 0 knots.
above table and figure; on the actual dis-
3. Press the E, AUTO PLOT MENU key play figures mark targets. Note that tar-
on the plotting keypad followed by the get numbering varies.
[0] key to show the ARPA 2 menu.
4. Press the [9] key to select 9 ARP
TRACK TEST. A track test picture ap-
pears on the screen.
5. Press the ENTER key.
2-17
2.17 Criteria for Selecting The digital radar signal is then analyzed
by a ship-sized echo discriminator. As the
Targets for Tracking antenna scans, if there are 5 consecutive
radar pulses with I's indicating an echo
The FURUNO ARPA video processor de-
presence at the exact same range, a tar-
tects targets in midst of noise and discrimi-
get "start" is initiated. Since receiver noise
nates radar echoes on the basis of their
is random, it is not three bang correlated,
size. Target whose echo measurements
and it is filtered out and not classified as
are greater than those of the largest ship
an echo.
in range or tangential extent are usually
land and are displayed only as normal The same is true of radar interference.
radar video. All smaller ship-sized echoes Electronic circuits track both the closet
which are less than this dimension are and most distant edges of the echo. At
further analyzed and regarded as ships the end of the scanning of the echo, the
and displayed as small circles superim- discriminator indicates the measured
posed over the video echo. maximum range extent and total angular
extent subtended by the echo. If the echo
When a target is first displayed, it is shown
is larger than a ship-sized echo in range
as having zero true speed but develops a
extent and/or angular width, adjusted as
course vector as more information is col-
a function of range, it is declared to be a
lected. In accordance with the Interna-
coastline and the closet edge is put into
tional Marine Organization Automatic
memory as a map of the area. This land
Radar Plotting Aid (IMO ARPA) require-
outline is used to inhibit further acquisi-
ments, an indication of the motion trend
tion and tracking of ship sized echoes
should be available in 1 minute and full
beyond the closest coast outline. 5 con-
vector accuracy in 3 minutes of plotting.
secutive scans of coastal outline are re-
The FURUNO ARPAs comply with these
tained in memory to allow for signal
requirements.
variation. All smaller echoes are declared
to be ship sized and the middle of the lead-
Acquisition and tracking ing edge is used to provide precise range
and bearing coordinates of each echo on
A target which is hit by 5 consecutive ra- every scan. This range/bearing data is
dar pulses is detected as a radar echo. matched to previous data and analyzed
Manual acquisition is done by designat- from scan-to-scan for consistency. When
ing a detected echo with the trackball. it is determined to be as consistent as a
Automatic acquisition is done in the ac- real target, automatic acquisition occurs
quisition areas when a target is detected and tracking is initiated. Continued track-
5-7 times continuously depending upon ing and subsequent calculation develop
the congestion. Tracking is achieved the relative course and speed of the tar-
when the target is clearly distinguishable get just as a man would do when plotting
on the display for 5 out of 10 consecutive the relative course and speed of the tar-
scans whether acquired automatically or get on the scope with a grease pencil.
manually.
The true course and speed of own ship
Targets not detected in 5 consecutive are computed from own ship's gyro and
scans become "lost targets." speed inputs, and the resulting course
and speed of each tracked target is eas-
ily computed by vector summing of the
Quantization relative motion with own ship’s course and
The entire picture is converted to a digital speed. The resulting true or relative vec-
from called "Quantized Video." A sweep tor is displayed for each of the tracked
range is divided into small segments and targets. This process is updated continu-
each range element is "1" if there is radar ally for each target on every scan of the
echo return above a threshold level, or radar.
"0" if there is no return.
2-18
Automatic acquisition areas and Rain and snow
suppression lines
Clutter can be acquired and tracked as
Performance of auto-acquisition is en- targets. Adjust the A/C RAIN control. If it
hanced by controlling the limit lines (sup- is heavy rain, switch to S-band if provided,
pression line) in the former series of or switch on the interference rejector on
FURUNO ARPAs. In this new series of the radar. If heavy clutter still exists, switch
ARPAs, the automatic acquisition rings to manual acquisition. Accuracy can be
are used instead of the limit lines. affected.

Auto acquisition rings work as suppres-

sion lines when viewed from the opposite Low clouds
direction. They should be placed clear of
Usually no effect. If necessary, adjust the
a landmass or shoreline. The acquisition
areas may be a full 360 degree circle or A/C RAIN control.
sector of any angles are gyro stabilize.
Non-synchronous emissions

Qualitative description of No effect.

tracking error
The FURUNO ARPA accuracies comply Low gain
with or exceed IMO standards.
Insufficient or low radar receiver gain will
result in some targets not being acquired
Own ship maneuvers at long distance. ARPA display will be
missing on one or more targets that could
For slow turns there is no effect. For very only be visible if the radar sensitivity con-
high turning rates (greater than 150°/ trol (GAIN control) were increased.
minute, depending on gyro), there is some
influence on all tracked targets which last The setting of the correct radar receiver
for a minute or two and then all tracked gain is not critical but the target should
targets revert to full accuracy. be on the radar PPI and be clearly visible
and well defined.
Other ship maneuvers
Manual acquisition is done if a target is
positively displayed more than once. Au-
Target ship courses, lag 15 to 30 seconds
tomatic acquisition is done when the tar-
at high relative speed, or 3 to 6 seconds
get is detected 5-7 times continuously.
at low (near 0) relative speed. It is less
Tracking is achieved when the target is
accurate during a turn due to lag, but ac-
detected 5 times (not necessarily continu-
curacy recovers quickly.
ously) out of 10 scans. If not detected 6
times out of 10 scans, the target will be-
come a "lost target." The ARPA will ac-
2.18 Factors Affecting ARPA quire a radar echo that is present once in
Functions every six antenna scans and continue
tracking if 1 in 10.
Sea returns
Second trace echoes
If the radar anti-clutter control is adjusted
properly, there is no serious effect be- When the radar beam is super refracted,
cause distant wave clutter, not eliminated strong echoes may be received at such
by this control, is filtered out by more than long ranges that they appear on a differ-
one bang correlation and scan-to-scan ent timebase sweep than the transmitted
matching of data.

2-19
pulse. This gives an incorrect range indi- To receive radar beacon or SART signals,
cation. Second and third trace echoes can turn off the radar interference rejection
be tracked if they are consistent enough and echo average which operate on the
to meet acquisition and tracking criteria correlation technique.
but target course and speed data will be
in error.

Blind and shadow sectors

Radar shadow or blind areas caused by
obstructions aboard ship, for example,
funnels and masts, in the path of the ra-
dar beam can result in reduction of radar
beam intensity in that particular direction.
This may eliminate the detection of some
targets. The ARPA system will lose track
of targets shortly after they are lost on the
radar picture and if they remain in a blind
zone. These targets will however be ac-
quired and tracked when they pass out of
the blind zone and again present normal
radar echo. The angular width and bear-
ing of any shadow sector should be de-
termined for their influence on the radar.
In certain cases false echoes in the
shadow sector cause the ARPA system
to acquire, track, and vector them.
Shadow sectors should be avoided.

Indirect echoes
A target at close range is usually picked
up directly, but it can also be received as
reflection from a large, flat surface. This
will result in the radar presenting two or
more echoes on the display, each at a
different range. The ARPA can acquire
and track the false echo if it is detected
by five consecutive scans. Reduction in
radar GAIN can eliminate the multiple
echoing but care should be taken as
range detection also will be reduced.

Radar interference
If interference is extreme due to another
radar operating at close range, spiral "dot-
ting" and/or false targets may appear
momentarily. The interference rejector can
clear the display.

2-20
 3. RADAR OBSERVATION
3.1 General For example, if the height of the antenna
above the waterline is 9 meters and the
Minimum and maximum ranges height of the target is 16 meters, the maxi-
mum radar range is;
Minimum range
Rmax= 2.2 x ( 9 + 16 ) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 nm
The minimum range is defined by the
shortest distance at which, using a scale It should be noted that the detection range
of 1.5 or 0.75 nm, a target having an echo- is reduced by precipitation (which absorbs
ing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate the radar signal).
from the point representing the antenna
position.
X-band and S-band
It is mainly dependent on the pulselength,
antenna height, and signal processing In fair weather, the above equation does
such as main bang suppression and digi- not give a significant difference between
tal quantization. It is a good practice to use X- and S-band radars. However, in heavy
a shorter range scale as far as it gives fa- precipitation condition, an S-band radar
vorable definition or clarity of picture. The would have better detection than an X-
IMO Resolution A. 477 (XII) and IEC 936 band radar.
require the minimum range to be less than
50 m. All FURUNO radars satisfy this re-
quirement. Radar resolution
There are two important factors in radar
Maximum range resolution (discrimination): bearing reso-
lution and range resolution.
The maximum detecting range of the ra-
dar, Rmax, varies considerably depending
on several factors such as the height of Bearing resolution
the antenna above the waterline, the height
of the target above the sea, the size, shape Bearing resolution is the ability of the ra-
and material of the target, and the atmo- dar to display as separate pips the ech-
spheric conditions. oes received from two targets which are
at the same range and close together. It is
Under normal atmospheric conditions, the proportional to the antenna length and re-
maximum range is equal to the radar hori- ciprocally proportional to the wavelength.
zon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is The length of the antenna radiator should
longer than the optical one by about 6% be chosen for a bearing resolution better
because of the diffraction property of the than 2.5° (IMO Resolution). This condition
radar signal. The Rmax is given in the fol- is normally satisfied with a radiator of 1.2
lowing equation. m (4 ft) or longer in the X-band. The S-
band radar requires a radiator of about 12
Rmax= 2.2 x (V h1 + i h2 ) feet (3.6 m) or longer.

where Rmax: radar horizon (nautical miles)

h1: antenna height (m) Range resolution
h2 : target height (m)
Range resolution is the ability to display
as separate pips the echoes received from
Radar horizon two targets which are on the same bear-
ing and close to each other. This is deter-
Optical horizon
3-1
mined by pulselength only. Practically, a Multiple echoes
0.08 microsecond pulse offers the discrimi-
nation better than 25 m as do so with all Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted
FURUNO radars. pulse returns from a solid object like a large
ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a
Test targets for determining the range and third or more echoes may be observed on
bearing resolution are radar reflectors hav- the display at double, triple or other mul-
ing an echoing area of 10 m2. tiples of the actual range of the target as
shown below. Multiple reflection echoes
Bearing accuracy can be reduced and often removed by
decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or prop-
One of the most important features of the erly adjusting the A/C SEA control.
radar is how accurately the bearing of a
target can be measured. The accuracy of True
bearing measurement basically depends echo
on the narrowness of the radar beam.
However, the bearing is usually taken rela-
tive to the ship’s heading, and thus, proper *•
adjustment of the heading marker at in- Target
stallation is an important factor in ensur-
Own ship
ing bearing accuracy. To minimize error Multiple
when measuring the bearing of a target, echo
put the target echo at the extreme posi-
tion on the screen by selecting a suitable
range. Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted,
Range measurement some radiation escapes on each side of
the beam, called "sidelobes." If a target
Measurement of the range to a target is exists where it can be detected by the side
also a very important function of the ra- lobes as well as the main lobe, the side
dar. Generally, there are two means of echoes may be represented on both sides
measuring range: the fixed range rings and of the true echo at the same range. Side
the variable range marker (VRM). The lobes show usually only on short ranges
fixed range rings appear on the screen with and from strong targets. They can be re-
a predetermined interval and provide a duced through careful reduction of the gain
rough estimate of the range to a target. or proper adjustment of the A/C SEA con-
The variable range marker’s diameter is trol.
increased or decreased so that the marker
touches the inner edge of the target, al-
lowing the operator to obtain more accu- Target A
rate range measurements. Target B
(Spurious) Target B
(True)

3.2 False Echoes

Occasionally echo signals appear on the
screen at positions where there is no tar- Virtual image
get or disappear even if there are targets.
A relatively large target close to your ship
They are, however, recognized if you un-
may be represented at two positions on
derstand the reason why they are dis-
the screen. One of them is the true echo
played. Typical false echoes are shown
directly reflected by the target and the other
below.

3-2
is a false echo which is caused by the mir- 3.3 SART (Search and Rescue
ror effect of a large object on or close to
your ship as shown in the figure below. If
Transponder)
your ship comes close to a large metal
A Search and Rescue Transponder
bridge, for example, such a false echo may
(SART) may be triggered by any X-Band
temporarily be seen on the screen.
(3 cm) radar within a range of approxi-
mately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received
Target ship
causes it to transmit a response which is
Own
swept repetitively across the complete ra-
ship dar frequency band. When interrogated, it
;;; ;;;
;; first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µs) throught the
;;;;;; ;;
; ;;
;;;;; ;; ;
;; band before beginning a relatively slow
;; ;;
;;
;;;;;; ;;; sweep (7.5 µs) through the band back to
;;;
;;; the starting frequency. This process is re-
;; ; echo True
peated for a total of twelve complete
;; ;;
;; ;; cycles. At some point in each sweep, the
SART frequency will match that of the in-
terrogating radar and be within the pass
band of the radar receiver. If the SART is
Mirror image False within range, the freguency match during
of target ship echo each of the 12 slow sweeps will produce a
response on the radar display, thus a line
of 12 dots equally spaced by about 0.64
Shadow sectors nautical miles will be shown.

Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the When the range to the SART is reduced
path of the antenna block the radar beam. to about 1 nm, the radar display may show
If the angle subtended at the scanner is also the 12 responses generated during
more than a few degrees, a non-detecting the fast sweeps. These additional dot re-
sector may be produced. Within this sec- sponses, which also are equally spaced
tor targets can not be detected. by 0.64 nm, will be interspersed with the
original line of 12 dots. They will appear
slightly weaker and smaller than the origi-
nal dots.
Radar
antenna General procedure for detecting
SART response
1. Use range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the
spacing between the SART responses
Radar is about 0.6nm (1125 m) to distinguish
mast the SART.
2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppres-
sion.
Blind zone
3. Turn off the Interference Rejector.
4. Turn off the Echo Average.

3-3
When the range to the SART is reduced General remarks on receiving
to about 1 nm, the radar display may show SART
also the 12 responses generated during
the fast sweeps. These additional dot re- SART range errors
sponses, which also are equally spaced
by 0.64 nm, will be interspersed with the When responses from only the 12 low fre-
original line of 12 dots. They will appear quency sweeps are visible (when the
slightly weaker and smaller than the origi- SART is at a range greater than about 1
nal dots. nm), the position at which the first dot is
displayed may be as much as 0.64 nm
Screen A: When SART Screen B: When SART
is distant is close beyond the true position of the SART.
Lines of 12 dots
are displayed in
When the range closes so that the fast
Echo of SART Radar antenna
concentric arcs. sweep responses are seen also, the first
beamwidth of these will be no more than 150 meters
Echo of
24 NM 1.5 NM
SART beyond the true position.
Position of
SART Radar bandwidth
Own ship's
position Own ship's
This is normally matched to the radar
SART mark
position
Position of pulselength and is usually switched with
9500 MHz
length
Radar receiver
SART
the range scale and the associated
9200 MHz
7.5 s
Sweep time bandwidth pluselength. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5
95 s MHz are used with long pulses on long
range and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz
with short pulses on short ranges.
Low speed sweep signal
Sweep start
High speed sweep signal
Any radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz
will attenuate the SART signal slightly, so
it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth
General procedure for detecting to ensure optimum detection of the SART.
SART response Radar side lobes
1. Use range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the
spacing between the SART responses As the SART is approached, side lobes
is about 0.6nm (1125 m) to distinguish from the radar antenna may show the
the SART. SART responses as a series of arcs or
conentric rings. These can be removed by
2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppres- the use of the anti-clutter sea control al-
sion. though it may be operationally useful to
3. Turn off the Interference Rejector. observe the side lobes as they may be
easier to detect in clutter conditions and
4. Turn off the Echo Average. also they will confirm that the SART is near
to the ship.

Gain

For maximum range SART detection the

normal gain setting for long range detec-
tion should be used, that is, with back-
ground noise speckle visible.

3-4
A/C SEA control 3.4 RACON (Radar Beacon)
For optimum range SART detection, this A racon is a radar transponder which emits
control should be set to the minimum. Care a characteristic signal when triggered by
should be exercised as wanted target in a ship's radar (usually only the 3 centime-
sea clutter may be obscured. Note also ter band). The signal may be emitted on
that in clutter conditions the first few dots the same frequency as that of the trigger-
of the SART response may not be detect- ing radar, in which case it is superimposed
able, irrespective of the setting of the anti- on the ship's radar display automatically.
clutter sea control. In this case, the position
of the SART may be estimated by mea- The racon signal appears on the PPI as a
suring 9.5 nm miles from the furthest dot radial line originating at a point just beyond
back towards own ship. the position of the radar beacon or as a
Morse code signal (figure below) displayed
Some sets have automatic/manual anti- redially from just beyond the beacon.
clutter sea control facilities in which case
the operator should switch to manual.

A/C RAIN control

This should be used normally (to break up

areas of rain) when trying to detect a SART
response which, being a series of dots, is
not affected by the action of the anti-clut-
ter rain circuitry. Note that Racon re-
sponses, which are often in the from of a
long flash, will be affected by the use of
this control.
Some sets have automatic/manual anti-
clutter rain control facilities in which case
the operator should switch to manual.
Note: This SART information is excerpted
from IMO SN/Circ 197 Operation of Ma-
rine Radar for SART Detection.

3-5
4. MAINTENANCE

DANGER
DANGER: Electrical Shock Hazard
This equipment contains high voltages which can cause death at several
internal circuits including a cathode ray tube (CRT) which uses several
thousand volts. Any internal adjustment, servicing and repair shall only be
performed by qualified service personnel totally familiar with electrical
circuits and servicing of the equipment. A residual charge remains in
capacitors and other devices several minutes after turning off the power.
It is therefore essential to wait at least 3 minutes to allow residual charge to
subside before accessing the inside of the equipment. Special care must be
taken when approaching the following parts:

• Power supply circuit (Display unit and separate power supply units)
• CRT circuit (Display unit)
• Modulator circuit and magnetron (Antenna unit or separate transceiver
unit)
• Motor drive circuit (Antenna unit)

WARNING
WARNING: When Working on the Antenna Unit
Wear a safety belt and a hard hat when working on the antenna unit.
Always make sure that the radar is POWERED OFF and the Antenna
switch in the display unit is OFF before working on the antenna unit.
Also take all steps to ensure that the radar will not be accidentally operated
by someone else, to prevent the potential risk of being struck by the
rotating antenna and exposure to RF radiation hazards.

Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any electronic systems. This
chapter contains maintenance instructions to be followed to obtain optimum performance and the long-
est possible life of the equipment.

4.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule

Interval Check point Check and measures Remarks
Weekly Display unit Periodically clean the exterior of CRT screen produces static
display unit using dry soft clean. Use charge which would attract dust.
of commercially available CRT DO NOT use strong solvent like
cleaner (spray) having antistatic paint thinner or abrasive cleaners
effect is recommended. for cleaning.
Dust and dirt on CRT creates
symptoms similar to poor
sensitivity.
(Continued on next page)
4-1
 Interval Check point Check and measures Remarks
3 to 6 Exposed nuts Check for corroded or loosened nuts Sealing compound may be used
months and bolts on and bolts. If necessary, clean and instead of paint. Apply a small
antenna unit repaint them thickly. Replace them if amount of grease between nuts
heavily corroded. and bolts for easy removal in
future.
Antenna Check for dirt and cracks on radiator Do not use plastic solvent
radiator surface. Thick dirt should be wiped (acetone) for cleaning. If you need
off with soft cloth dampened with to remove ice from antenna unit,
fresh water. if a crack is found, apply use a wooden hammer or plastic
a slight amount of sealing compound head hammer. Crack on the unit
or adhesive as a temporary remedy, may cause water ingress, causing
then call for repair. serious damages to internal
circuits.
Terminal strips Open antenna cover to check When closing antenna covers in
and plugs in terminal strip and plug connections position, be careful not to catch
antenna unit inside. Also check the rubber gasket loose wires between covers and
of antenna covers for deterioration. unit.
6 months CRT and High voltage at CRT and If CRT anode rubber cap or wire
to one surrounding surrounding components attract dust sheath is cracked, ask your dealer
year components in environment which will cause to replace it. Wait for at least 3
poor insulation. Ask your nearest minutes until high voltage
FURUNO representative or dealer to components (CRT and HV
clean internal high-voltage capacitors) discharge their residual
components. charges before accessing them.
Terminal strips, Check for loose connections. Check
sockets, earth contacts and plugs for proper seating,
terminal etc.

4.2 Life Expectancy of Major Parts

Part Type Life expectancy Remarks

Antenna RM-8123 (X-band) Gears more than Wind load
motor RM-8124 (X-band) 10,000 hours 100 knots
RM-8247 (X-band)
RM-7398 (S-band)
RM-7435 (S-band)
RM-9519 (S-band)
RM-9520 (S-band)
RM-9521 (S-band)
Magnetron MG5241 (X-band 10 kW) 2,000-3,000 hours
9M752/M5187F (X-band, 25 kW)
MG5223F (S-band, 30 kW)
MG5240 (S-band, 60 kW)

4-2
5. TROUBLESHOOTING

DANGER
DANGER: Electrical Shock Hazard
This equipment contains high voltages which can cause death at several
internal circuits including a cathode ray tube (CRT) which uses several
thousand volts. Any internal adjustment, servicing and repair shall only be
performed by qualified service personnel totally familiar with electrical
circuits and servicing of the equipment. A residual charge remains in
capacitors and other devices several minutes after turning off the power.
It is therefore essential to wait at least 3 minutes to allow residual charge to
subside before accessing the inside of the equipment. Special care must be
taken when approaching the following parts:

• Power supply circuit (Display unit and separate power supply units)
• CRT circuit (Display unit)
• Modulator circuit and magnetron (Antenna unit or separate transceiver
unit)
• Motor drive circuit (Antenna unit)

WARNING
WARNING: When Working on the Antenna Unit
Wear a safety belt and a hard hat when working on the antenna unit.
Always make sure that the radar is POWERED OFF and the Antenna
switch in the display unit is OFF before working on the antenna unit.
Also take all steps to ensure that the radar will not be accidentally operated
by someone else, to prevent the potential risk of being struck by the
rotating antenna and exposure to RF radiation hazards.

5.1 Easy Troubleshooting

This paragraph describes how to cure operational problems, which can be made by observing the
radar picture and using operator controls and keys without opening the display unit, antenna unit
or other equipment units.
The table below shows user-level troubleshooting procedures.

Problem Remedy
Key beep inaudible Adjust key beep level on RADAR 2 menu referring to
paragraph 1.32.
No own ship mark On the R-type radar, check that SHIP'S MARK ON is selected
at the RADAR 2 menu, referrring to paragraph 1.32. Also, own
ship information (length, width, etc.) should have been entered
in initial settings. Consult a FURUNO representative or dealer
for details. On the IMO type, the own ship mark is not
available.

5-1
5.2 Advanced-level person holding an operator certificate contain-
ing a ship radar endorsement.
Troubleshooting
This is what the U.S. Codes of Federal Regu-
This paragraph describes how to cure hard- lations part 80.169 implies (not exact extract).
ware and software troubles which should be
carried out by qualified service personnel. As such, every administration sets forth its own
rule; service personnel must be aware of this
Note: This radar equipment contains complex kind of competency requirements.
modules in which fault diagnosis and repair
down to component level are not practicable Service call
by users.
When making a service call to your service
agent, check S/N and symptom beforehand.
Serviceman qualification
All adjustments of radio transmitter during or
coinciding with the installation, servicing, or
maintenance which may affect the proper op-
eration must be performed by or under the im-
mediate supervision and responsibility of a

Problem Check point and Remedy

probable cause
Power turned on but radar 1. Blown fuse F1 or F2 1. Replace blown fuse.
does not operate at all. 2. Mains voltage/polarity 2. Correct wirings and input voltage.
Control panel is not 3. Power Supply Board 3. Replace Power Supply Board.
illuminated either. 4. Illumination lamps 4. Replace defective lamps.
CRT brilliance adjusted but 1. RADAR 1/2 menu settings 1. In case of single display install-
no picture ation without radar inter-
switching), make sure RADAR 1
is selected on SYSTEM
2. CRT voltage SETTING menu.
2. Check high voltage supply with
3. SPU Board utmost care.
3. Replace SPU Board.
Antenna not rotating 1. Antenna drive 1. Make sure that there is no
mechanism (Note that the short circuit across #1 and #2 of
message BRG SIG J461 on IN-9170 Board.
MISSING appears in
stand-by.)
2. Defective antenna drive 2. Press relay reset button.
motor relay (thermal
relay K2, 200/220/380,
440/100VAC)
3. INT-9170 Board 3. Check that atenna switch is on.
Alphanumeric data and 1. SPU Board 1. Replace SPU Board.
marks are not displayed in
Transmit status.

5-2
Problem Check point and Remedy
probable cause
Adjust GAIN control with 1. IF amplifier 1. Replace IF amplifier.
A/C SEA control set at 2. Signal cable between 2. Check continuity and isolation of
minimum. Marks and antenna and display coaxial cable. (Note: Disconnect
legends appear but no noise the plug and lugs at both ends of
or echo. coaxial cable before checking it
by ohmmeter.)
3. Video Amplifier Board 3. Check video coax line for secure
connection. If connection is good,
replace SPU Board.
Marks, legends and noise 1. Tx fuse F801 (Trans. Unit) 1. If fuse is blown, replace it. If it
appear but no echo. blows again, the modulator or
(Transmission leak, modulator circuit may be
representing own ship defective.
position, is absent.) 2. Magnetron 2. Check magnetron current with the
check meter in the sub panel.
Replace magnetron.
3. Modulator Board 3. Replace Modulator Board.
3. Replace SCR. DANGER: HIGH
VOLTAGE.
4. SPU Board 4. Replace SPU Board.
Picture not updated 1. Bearing Signal Generator 1. Check the connection of signal
Board (antenna unit) cable.
2. SPU Board 2. Replace SPU Board.
3. Video lockup 3. Turn off and on radar.
Incorrect orientation of 1. SPU Board 1. The message "HD SIG
picture MISSING" appears when the
heading pulse is not received
during stand-by.
2. Gyro Interface 2. Replace gyro interface.
TUNE control adjusted but 1. Deteriorated magnetron 1. With radar transmitting on 48 mm
poor sensitivity range, check magnetron
current. If current is below normal
value, magnetron may be
defective. Replace magnetron.
2. Detuned MIC 2. Check MIC detecting current. If it
is below normal value, MIC may
have become detuned. MIC must
be tuned.
3. Dirt on radiator face 3. Clean radiator surface.
4. Water ingress to the wave- 4. Remove water from the feeder
guide or other feeder line line.
5. Second trace rejection is 5. Disable the second-trace rejector
ON. referring to paragraph 1.36.
Range changed but radar 1. Defective RANGE key 1. Try to hit [+] and [-] RANGE
picture does not change keys several times. If unsuccess-
ful, replacement of keypad may
be required.
2. SPU Board 2. Replace SPU Board.
3. Mother Board 3. Replace Mother Board.
4. Video lockup 4. Turn off and on radar.

5-3
Problem Check point and Remedy
probable cause
Interference rejector 1. Bad contact of key 1. Repair contact of key.
inoperable (interference 2. SPU Board 2. Replace SPU Board.
rejection level not 3. Mother Board 3. Replace Mother Board.
displayed)
Echo stretch ineffective 1. Bad contact of key 1. Repair contact of key.
(Neither "ES1" nor "ES2" is 2. SPU Board 2. Replace SPU Board.
displayed.)
Only 2 parallel index lines 1. Incorrect setting of index 1. Set index line interval referring to
(6 lines wanted) line interval paragraph 1.26.
Range rings are not 1. Press RINGS key to see if 1. Replace associated circuit board if
displayed. intensity is increased. unsuccessful.
control to see if intensity is
increased.
2. Bad contact of key 2. Replace keypad.
3. SPU Board 3. Replace SPU Board.
Key beep inaudible 1. Improper setting on 1. Adjust key beep level on
RADAR 2 menu RADAR 2 menu referring to
paragraph 1.32.
Poor discrimination at 1. Sea clutter control not 1. Improper setting of A/C SEA
range functioning properly. control. If A/C SEA is seen only
at very close range, suspect
inaccurate frequency of
crystal oscillator.
True motion presentation 1. Poor contact of MODE 1. Try to press MODE key a little
not working correctly key. harder.
2. Selection is not accessed. 2. Press MODE key until "TM"
appears.
3. Speed entry is incorrect. 3. Enter correct own ship speed
referring to paragraph 1.24.
4. TM display inaccurate 4. Make sure that speed and compass
inputs are accurate.
Target not tracked correctly 1. Poor definition of targets in 1. Adjust A/C SEA and A/C RAIN
sea clutter controls referring to paragraphs
1.13 and 1.14.

5-4
5.3 Diagnostic Test Hit [RADAR MENU].

A diagnostic test program is provided to en- [FUNCTIONS]

I
able testing of major circuit boards in the radar 1 PULSEWIDTH 1/2
2 ECHO STRETCH OFF/1/
display unit. Note that the normal radar picture 3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
is lost during this test. 4
5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR
6 SHIP'S SPEED LOG/MAN
Proceed as follows to execute the diagnostic 7 INDEX LINES NO.2/MAN
test: 8 2ND ECHO REJ OFF/ON
9 BRILLIANCE
0 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
1. Press the RADAR MENU key on the plot-
ting keypad to show the FUNCTIONS menu. 11
Hit [0]. 1
2. Press numeric key [0][0] to show the SYS- [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS]
TEM SETTING 2 menu. 2 RADAR 1
3 FUNCTION KEY 1
3. On the R-type, press the key [3] to select 4 FUNCTION KEY 2
5 FUNCTION KEY 3
menu item 3TEST . Then, press the ENTER 6 FUNCTION KEY 4
key. 7 RADAR 1/2
8 INTERSWITCH
9 ANCHOR WATCH
On the IMO-type, press the key [3] to 0 [SYSTEM SETTING 2]
select menu item 3TEST . Then, press
numeric key [3] again to highlight select Hit [0].
TEST ON, followed by the ENTER key. IMO-type
Now, the diagnostic test is executed and [SYSTEM SETTING 2]
the screen shows test results as shown on Hit [0]. 12 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
the next page. 3 TEST

4. To terminate the diagnostic test, turn off the G-type y

'
power switch. Perform "quick start" (see [SYSTEM SETTING 2]
page 1-1) if you wish to restore normal ra- 1 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
dar operation immediately. 2 OFF/ON
3 TEST
Small squares displayed at the right and bot-
tom of the test result screen are for testing the
switches and keys in the hinged compartments
of the display unit and on the operator control
panel. As you operate these switches and keys,
corresponding squares are highlighted, indicat-
ing that your switch/key operations are prop-
erly recognized.

5-5
FR-2005 TEST
PROGRAM NO ROM RAMCRAM DIPSW
MAIN XXXXXXXXXXX OK OK OK 1111
SUB XXXXXXXXXX OK OK
ARP XXXXXXXXXX OK OK OK 0000
DSP XXXXXXXXXX OK OK OK
RP XXXXXXXXXX OK OK OK 1000
DRAM
RP BOARD BAT OK
RP CARD1 OK CARD2 OK
VRAM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

°° 00 OOOO UDDD
HO oo
oo

Square are highlighted as

corresponding keys are pressed. These squares are for
ST-BY, DEGAUSS and
Two lines are for control panel. AUTO/MAN TUNE
switches from above.

5-6
 APPENDIX
A.1 Performance Monitor
Transmitter Receiver
For X-band radars, the FURUNO PM-30 performance performance
satisfies the reguirement covering Range to Loss No. of Loss
9410±50 MHz. For S-band radars, the innermost arcs
PM-50 is available covering 3050±30 arc
MHz. 12 nm 0 dB 4 0 dB
The performance monitor is an indepen- 9 nm 3 dB 3 3 dB
dent unit, namely, it is not interconnected 6 nm 6 dB 2 6 dB
with any unit of the radar system except
for the 100 VAC power cable. In some 3 nm or 10 dB 1 9 dB
radars the power cable is not routed via less or none
the power switch or other control of the 0 12 dB
radar and the monitor is operated as com-
pletely a separate device.

Operating the performance Display Meaning

monitor TRANSMITTER: normal
RECEIVER: normal
When Radar Interswitch RJ-7 is con-
nected, set it to the "straight" mode. Press 12 nm

the PM ON/OFF button at the lower left

corner in the Turning Compartment, and
the range scale is automatically set to 24 TRANSMITTER: 3 db loss
nm range scale, producing the monitor (Transmitter system has lost
display. The radar screen will show sev- half of initial power.
9 nm Suspect magnetron and
eral arcs, opposite to the heading marker feeder system.)
(provided that the performance monitor RECEIVER: normal
is installed behind the radar antenna as
is normally the case). If the radar trans- TRANSMITTER: 3 db loss
(Transmitter system has lost
mitter and receiver are in good working half of initial power.
conditions in as much as the original state 9 nm Suspect magnetron and
when the monitor was turned up, the in- feeder system.)
RECEIVER: 3 db loss
nermost are should appear at 12 nm and (Receiver has lost half of
there should be a total of 4 arcs. normal sensitivity. Suspect
receiver front end, water
The range of the innermost arc reduces leakage in feeder system,
3 nm with every 3 dB loss of transmitted etc.
power. The receiver sensitivity can be
evaluated from the number of visible arcs;
one arc is lost every 3 dB deterioration of
the sensitivity.

A-1
A.2 For Fishing Vessel If the BIRD option is menu-selected at the
time of installation, the corresponding
This radar can be customized as a fish- function key is labeled "BIRD." Press the
ing vessel version with an internal setting. function key "BIRD" and the radar will be
The fishing vessel version offers an addi- set for optimum detection of sea birds
tional picture setup option "BIRD," which between 6 and 16 nm. As is well known
is assignable to one of the function keys by professional fishermen, locating a flock
depending on a setting on FUNCTION of sea birds is useful for finding certain
KEY 1, 2 , 3 or 4 menu shown below. species of fish.

[FUNCTION KEY 1]
1 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
2 FUNCTION FUNC1/RIVER/BUOY/
SHIP/SHORT/LONG/
CRUISING/HARBOR/ Hit [3]. Hit [RADAR MENU].
COAST/OCEAN/ <
ROUGH SEA/ BIRD
I
I
3 INT REJECT OFF/1/2/3 I
I
I 4 NEXT PAGE I
[FUNCTIONS]
I I
1 PULSE WD 1/2
2 ECHO STRETCH 2
OFF/1/2
3 ECHO AVERAGE OFF/1/2/3
4
[FUNCTION KEY 2] 5 ECHO COLOR YEL/GRN/COLOR
1 [SYSTEM SETTING 1] 6 SHIP'S SPEED LOG/MAN
2 FUNC KEY2 PICTURE/OPERATION 7 INDEX LINES NO.2/MAN
3 FUNCTION FUNC2/RIVER/BUOY/ 8 2ND ECHO REJ OFF/ON
SHIP/SHORT/LONG/ Hit [4]. 9 BRILLIANCE
CRUISING/HARBOR/ 0 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
COAST/OCEAN/
ROUGH SEA/BIRD
I I

I 4 INT REJECT OFF/1/2/3 I Hit [0].

I 5 NEXT PAGE I

I I

[SYSTEM SETTING 1]
1 [FUNCTIONS]
2 RADAR 1
3 FUNCTION KEY 1
[FUNCTION KEY 3] 4 FUNCTION KEY 2
1 [SYSTEM SETTING 1] 5 FUNCTION KEY 3
2 FUNC KEY3 PICTURE / 6 FUNCTION KEY 4
3 FUNCTION WATCH ALARM Hit [5]. 7 RADAR 1/2
FUNC3/RIVER/BUOY/ 8 INTERSWITCH
SHIP/SHORT/LONG/ 9 ANCHOR WATCH
CRUISING/HARBOR/ 0 [SYSTEM SETTING 2]
COAST/OCEAN/
ROUGH SEA/BIRD
I I
I 4 INT REJECT OFF/1/2/ 3 I
I 5 NEXT PAGE I
I I

[FUNCTION KEY 4]
1 [SYSTEM SETTING 1]
2 FUNC KEY4 PICTURE /
3 FUNCTION WATCH ALARM
HU/HU TB/CU/NU/TM/
TRAILCU, TM RESET/
OFF CENTERIDX LINES/ Hit [6].
CURSOR OFFSET/
ECHO STRETCH1/
ECHO STRETCH2/
ECHO STRETCH3/
ECHO COLOR/
TRAIL BRILL/PANEL BRILL/
CHAR BRILL/NOISE REJ

Note: Items enclosed by dashed lines should be left in the default settings. For further
information, contact a FURUNO representative.

A-2
A.3 Navigation Data (IEC 61162-1 Edition 1 and Edition2)
1. I/O Sentences for Channel 1

Input

BWC, BWR, DBT, DPT, GGA, GLL, MTW, MWV, RMA, RMB, RMC, VDR, VTG(*),
ZDA *: not recommended in IMO-type

2. I/O Sentences of Channel 2

Input

VBW, VHW, HDT

Output

RAOSD, RARSD (An interval of three seconds)

3. I/O Sentences of Channel 3

Output

RATTM (Every five seconds when acquiring 10 targets)

4. Sentence Description
See pages which follow.
Note: Checksum for RMA, RMB, and RMC is mandatory. Checksum for other sen-
tences is evaluated if it exists.

5. Priority
Nav data sentences below are read left to right, and in case of timeout the sentence
right of last read sentace is read. In case of multiple high priority sentences the sen-
tences having the highest priority is read. ** is read regardless of talker. Timeout is 30
seconds unless specified otherwise. Difficult time-outs for data sentences are required
by German authorities.

Position data

GPGGA>GPRMC>GPGLL>LCRMA>LCGLL>**GLL
Timeout: 30 seconds

A-3
Data, time data

GPZDA
Timeout: 10 seconds

Course heading, speed over ground

(In the case of log)

VDVBW>**VBVBW
(In the case of navigator)
GPVTG>GPRMC (Not recommended in IMO-type)

Course heading, speed over water

VDVBW>**VBW>VD VHW

Water depth data

SDDPT>SDDBT>**DBT>**DBS

Water temperature data

**MTW

Waypoint range and bearing data

GPBWR>GPBWC>GPRBM

Route data (WPL, RTE)

*WPL
*RTE

Ship's heading

**HDT

A-4
 INT9170
*

J450
CHANNEL 1 PORT : H8P-SHF-AA
<1 <
LISTENER (2mA at 2V) <2 < R31 U1
INPUT NAV-RXD A 3 < <— VW
NAV-RXD B 4 << 470Q ;
<5 <
<76<
<8 < CR5 PC900V
<< 1SS133

U11
CHANNEL 2 PORT
TALKER (60 mA max) \
J455
H5P- SHF-AA
L SPU Board
14
OUTPUT- TXD B 1 << 15 CPU
RD1
TXD A 2
INPUT NAV-RXDA <3 <
< < VJ TX
UART
IF-2300
RD2 INPUT NAV-RXDB 4
<< 13
(LISTENER (2 mA at 2V)
<5 < PI 3 ? SN751178N
W- V8
470 St
a? 30
EK
/ SS /A3 U2
PC 9oov

CHANNEL 3 PORT J454

H5P-SHF-AA
J*
TALKER (60 mA max) i ARP Board
OUTPUT ARPA-TXD B 1 << — 9 CPU
ARPA-TXD A 2 << TX
<34< UARTS
<< 11
<5< SN751178N

A-5
SIMPLIFIED INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

(See Installation Manual for terminal connection)

-
RW 4873
(25C + 2C2V)
RJ-7 INTERSWITCH J457 DJ1 (MB) TB801

RJ-7 INTERSWITCH or J458

EXTERNAL SIG IN ANTENNA SCANNER
CHANNEL 1 PORT

J450
(Channel1)

TB1 SHIP’S MAINS

i
i
J455
i
GYRO CONV ii
(Channel 2) i
GC-8 i
GYROCOMPASS
OR
J446 GYRO CONVERTER
CHANNEL 3 PORT J454
OUTPUT for ARPA (TTM) (Channel 3)

J448 SDME (Speed pulse)

J444 Radar Video, Trigger, Azimuth,

HDG for EXT ARPA

J442 SLAVE DISPLAY

Interface
optional
VDR (RGB video) J449 J443 SLAVE DISPLAY

03P9225
(Optional)
Not used in J402 P. MONITOR
IMO type J456 J403

J463 J452 Not used

+12V, +5V
SPARE J445

Note: The FR/FAR-2805 does not process the IEC61162-2 data. Therefore, the sys-
tem may only work as HSC radar by receiving gyro compass data thru GC-8 or AD-
100.

A-6
A.4 Sentence Description

Channel 1 Input

BWC - Bearing and distance to waypoint - great circle

Waypoint ID
Mode indication *2
Distance, nautical miles
(A/D/E/M/S/N)
Bearing, degrees magnetic *1
Checksum
$--BWC , hhmmss.ss, 1111 .11, a, yyyyy. yy, a, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, c--c ,a*hh<CR><LF>

Bearing, degrees true

Waypoint longitude, E/W
Waypoint latitude, N/S
UTC of observation *1
*1 Not used
*2 Edition 2 only

BWR - Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line

Time (UTC) and distance and bearing to, location of, a specified waypoint from present position.
$-BWR data is calculated along the rhumb line from present position rather than along the great circle path

Waypoint ID
Distance TO WPT, nautical miles — Mode indication *2
(See note in below.)
Bearing, degrees magnetic *1
Checksum
$--BWR, hhmmss.ss, 111111
. . a, yyyyy . yy, a, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, c --c ,a*hh<CR><LF>

Bearing, degrees true

Waypoint longitude, E/W
Waypoint latitude, N/S
UTC of observation *1

*1 Not used
*2 Edition 2 only

Note: The mode indicatior charactor "a" has been defined as follows:
A= Automonous mode
D= Differential mode
E= Estimated (dead reckonning) mode
M= Manual input mode
S= Simulator mode
N= Data not valid

A-7
 DBT - Depth below transducer

Water depth referenced to the transducer.

$--DBT, x.x, f , x.x, M, x.x, F*hh<CRxLF>

Checksum
Water depth, fathoms
Water depth, m
Water depth, feet

Priority: f > M > F

DPT - Depth

IMO Resolution A .224 (VII) . Water depth relative to the transducer and offset of the measuring transducer.
Positive offset numbers provide the distance from the transducer to the waterline.
Negative offset numbers provide the distance from the transducer to the part of the keel of interest.
Checksum
--
$ DPT, x.x, x.x , x.x*hh<CR><LF>
Maximum range scale in use *1
L Offset from transducer, in meters
= distance from transducer to water-line
— Water depth relative to the transducer, in meters
*1 Edition 2 only, not used.

GGA - Global positioning system (GPS) fix data

Time , position and fix related data for a GPS receiver.

Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023 *1

Age of differential GPS data *1 -
Unit of geoid height, m *1
Geoid height (-999 - 0999) *1 —
Unit of antenna height, m *1 —
Antenna height (-9999 - 99999) *1— Checksum

Horizontal dilution of precision (00 - 99) *1

1
$--GGA, hhmmss.ss ,1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x, xx, x.x, x.x, M, x.x, M, x.x, xxxx*hh<CR><LF>

LNumber of satellite in use, 00-12 *1

Status (0= data invalid,
1= GPS SPS mode,
Longitude - E/W 2= DGPS SPS mode,
Latitude - N/S 3= GPS PPS mode,
UTC of position *1 4= RTK,
5= Float RTK,
*1 Not used 6= Estimated mode,
7= Manual input mode,
8= Simulator mode)

A-8
GLL - Geographic position - latitude/longitude

Latitude and longitude of vessel position, time of position fix and status.
Mode indicator (See note on page A-7.) *2
$--GLL, 1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, hhmmss.ss ,a*hh<CR><LF>
, A
l_ Checksum
Status (A = data valid V = data invalid)
UTC of position *1
Longitude, E/W
Latitude, N/S

*1 Not used
*2 Edition 2 only

MTW - Water temperature

—
$ MTW, x.x, C*hh<CRxLF>
I Checksum
Temperature, degrees C (99.9 to - 99.9 °C)
Display range: 99.9 to - 99.9 °C

MWV - Wind speed and angle

When the reference field is set to relative, data is provided giving the wind angle in relation to the vessel s
heading and wind speed, both relative to the moving vessel.

When the reference field is set to true, data is provided giving the wind angle relative to the vessel s heading
and wind speed, both with reference to the moving water. True wind is the vector sum of the relative apparent
wind vector and the vessel s velocity vector along the heading line of the vessel. If represents the wind at the
vessel if it were stationary relative to the water and heading in the same direction.

$--MWV, x.x, a, x.x, a, A*hh<CRxLF>

—
1 Checksum
— Status (A = data valid V = data invalid)
1 Wind speed unit (K/M/N)
-

— Wind speed
Reference, R = relative
T = true
- Wind angle (0 to 359.9 degrees)

A-9
 RMA - Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data

Position, course and speed data provided by a LORAN-C receiver. Time differences A and B are those used in
computing latitude/longitude. Checksum is mandatory in this sentence. This sentence is transmitted at intervals
not exceeding 2 s and is always accompanied by RMB when a destination waypoint is active.
RMA and RMB are the recommended minimum data to be provided by a LORAN-C receiver. All data fields
must be provided, null fields used only when data is temporarily unavailable.

Checksum, mandatory for RMA

Magnetic variation (000.0 - 179.9 ° ) , degrees E/W*1—
Bearing, degrees *1 —
Speed over ground, knots*1
Time difference B,*1—
(00000.0 - 99999.9 ps)
Time difference A,*1
(00000.0 - 99999.9 ps)

$~RMA, A, 1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x, x.x, a ,a*hh<CR><LF>

Mode indicator
Longitude, degrees, E/W (See note on page A-7.) *2
1— Latitude, degrees, N/S
— Status (A = data valid, V = blink, cycle or SNR warning)
*1 Not used
*2 Edition 2 only

RMB - Recommended minimum navigation information

Navigation data from present position to a destination waypoint provided by a LORAN-C, TRANSIT, OMEGA,
GPS, DECCA, navigation computer or other integrated navigation system. Checksum is mandatory in this
sentence. This sentence always accompanies RMA or RMC sentences when a destination is active when
-
provided by a LORAN-C, TRANSIT or GPS receiver, other systems may transmit $ RMB without $--RMA or
—
$ RMC.

Checksum, mandatory for RMB -

Arrival status: A = arrival circle entered or perpendicular passed*1
Destination closing velocity, knots*1
— .
Bearing to destination, degrees true —
Range to destination, nautical miles —
Waypoint longitude, E/W

--
$-RMB, A, x.x, a, c c, c --c, 1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, x.x, x.x, A ,a*hh<CR><LF>
Mode indicator
Waypoint latitude, N/S (See note on page A-7.) *2
Destination waypoint ID
Origin waypoint ID *1
— Direction to steer, (L = Port R = Starboard) *1
— Cross track error , nautical miles *1
Status (A = data valid V = navigation receiver warning)
*1 Not used
*2 Edition 2 only

A-10
RMC - Recommended specific GPS/TRANSIT data

Time, date, position, course and speed data provided by a GPS or TRANSIT navigation receiver.
Checksum is mandatory in this sentence. This sentence is transmitted at intervals not exceeding 2 s and is
always accompanied by RMB when a destination waypoint is active. RMC and RMB are the recommended
minimum data to be provided by a GPS or TRANSIT receiver. All data fields must be provided, null fields used
only when data is temporarily unavailable.

Checksum, mandatory for RMC

Magnetic variation (000.0 - 180.0 ° ), degrees EMI *1
Date: dd/mm/yy *1—
Course made good, degrees t
1
$-- RMC, hhmmss.ss, A, 1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, x.x, x.x, xxxxxx, x.x, a ,a*hh<CR><LF>
Mode indicator
Speed over ground, knotsf (See note on
Longitude, EMI page A-7.) *2
L- Latitude, N/S
— Receive status (V = navigation receiver warning)
UTC of position fix *1
*1 Not used
*2 Edition 2 only
t Not used on G-type
RTE - Routes

Waypoint identifiers, listed in order with starting waypoint first, for the identified route. Two modes of
transmission are provided: “c” indicates that the complete list of waypoints in the route is being transmitted;
“w” indicates a working route where the first listed waypoint is always the last waypoint that had been reached
(FROM) , while the second listed waypoint is always the waypoint that the vessel is currently heading for (TO),
the remaining list of waypoints represents the remainder of the route.

$~RTE, x.x, x.x, a, c-c, c-c, c--c*hh<CR><LF>

I Checksum
Waypoint “n” identifier
— Waypoint “1” identifier
— Route identifier
— Message mode (C = complete route, W = working route)
— Message number
Total number of messages being transmitted

A-11
 VDR - Set and drift

The direction towards which a current flows (set) and speed (drift) of current.

$--VDR, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N *hh<CR><LF>

I Checksum
— — Current speed, knots
— — Direction, degrees magnetic *1
Direction, degrees true
*1 Not used

VTG - Course over ground and ground speed (R-TYPE ONLY)

The actual course and speed relative to the ground.

r Checksum
$-- VTG, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, x.x, K ,a*hh<CR><LF>
Mode indicator (A/D/E/M/S/N) *2
Speed over ground, K = km/h
Speed over ground, knots
Couse over ground, degrees magnetic *1
Couse over ground, degrees true
*1 Not used
*2 Edition 2 only

WPL - Waypoint location

Latitude and longitude of specified waypoint

$--WPL, 1111.11, a, yyyyy.yy, a, c--c*hh<CR ><LF>

Checksum
— Waypoint identifier
Waypoint longitude, E/W
Waypoint latitude, N/S

ZDA - Time and date

UTC, day, month, year and local time zone.

$--ZDA , hhmmss.ss, xx, xx, xxxx, xx, xx*hh<CRxLF>

L Checksum
I— Local zone description, minutes *1
Local zone description, hours *1
Year
— Month, 01 to 12
Day, 0 to 31
UTC
*1 Not used

A-12
Channel 2 input
VBW - Dual ground/water speed Checksum
--
$ VBW,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,x.x,A ,x.x,A,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
Status: stern ground speed *1
Stern transverse ground speed (knots) *1
Status: stern water speed *1
Stern transverse water speed (knots) *1
Status, ground speed (A= data valid, V= data invalid)
Transverse ground speed (knots)
Longitudinal ground speed (knots)
Status (A= data valid, V= data invalid)
Transverse water speed (knots)
Longitudinal water speed (knots) *1 Edition 2 only
VHW - Water speed and heading

The compass heading to which the vessel points and the speed of the vessel relative to the water.

$-- VHW, x.x, T, x.x, M, x.x, N, x.x, K *hh<CRxLF> Priority ; N > km

1 Checksum
— Water speed, K = km/h
Water speed, knots
— — Heading (M = magnetic bearing)
Heading (T = true bearing)

HDT - Heading - true

$--HDT, x.x, T *hh<CR><LF>

Checksum
Heading, degrees true

Channel 2 output
OSD - own ship data
$OSD,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CRxLF>
1 Checksum
Speed units, K/N/S
Vessel drift (speed)
Vessel set, degrees true
Speed reference (see note)
Vessel speed
Course reference (see note)
Vessel course, degrees true
— Heading status: A = data valid
Heading, degrees true

Note - Reference systems (speed/course)

B = bottom tracking log
M = manually entered
W = water referenced
R = radar tracking (of fixed target)
P = positioning system ground reference

A-13
 RSD -Radar system data

$--RSD,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,x.x,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
- Checksum
Display rotation (see note 1)
— Range units, K/N/S
— Range scale in use
— Cursor bearing, degrees clockwise from 0°
— Cursor range, from own ship
— EBL 2, degrees
I— VRM 2, range
Origin 2 bearing (see note 2)
— Origin 2 range ( see note 2)
— Bearing line 1 (EBL1), degrees from 0°
— Variable range marker 1 ( VRM1), range
— Origin 1 bearing, degrees from 0° (see note 2)
Origin 1 range, from own ship (see note 2)

Notes
1 Display rotation:
C = course-up, course-over-ground up, degree true
H = head-up, ship's heading (centre-line) 0 up
N = north-up, true north is 0 up
2 Origin 1 and origin 2 are located at the stated range and bearing from own ship and provide for two
independent sets of variable range markers (VRM) and electronic bearing lines (EBL) originating away
from own ship position.

A-14
Channel 3 output
TTM - Tracked target message
Type of acqiusition (A/M/R) *2
$--TTM,xx,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,a,a,hhmmss.ss,a*hh<CR><LF>
I Checksum
Time of data (UTC) *1
Reference target = R, null otherwise
Target status (see note)
User data (e.g. target name) *1
Speed/distance unit, K/N/S
— Time to CPA, min., increasing

Distance of closest point of approach

Target course, degrees triue/relative (T/R)
Target speed
Bearing from own ship, degrees true/relative (T/R)
- Target distance from own ship
Target number, 00 to 99

Note Target status:

L = lost, tracked target has been lost
Q = query, target in the process of acquisition
T = tracking

*1 Not used
*2 Edition 2 only

A-15
MENU TREE
MAIN MENU
FUNCTIONS 1
-1. PULSE WIDTH (1, 2)
- 2. ECHO STRETCH (OFF, 1, 2)
"
3. ECHO AVERAGE (OFF, 1, 2, 3) *: R -type only
- 4. PANEL DIMMER (OFF, DIM, M, BRT)
"
5. ECHO COLOR (YEL, GRN, COLOR*)
“ 6. SHIP SPEED (LOG, NAV*, MAN)
"
7. INDEX LINES (No.2 VRM, MAN)
"
8. SET/DRIFT (OFF, MAN)
“
9. BRILLIANCE “ - 1. FUNCTIONS 1
L 0. FUNCTIONS 2 - 2. CHAR BRILL (DIM, M1, M2, BRT)
- 3. MARKS BRILL (DIM, M1, M2, BRT)
- 4. TRAIL BRILL (DIM, M1, M2, BRT)
"
5. +CURSOR BRILL (DIM, M, BRT)
- 6. PLOT BRILL (OFF, DIM, M, BRT)
FUNCTIONS 2
“
7. HDG MARK BRILL (DIM, M, BRT)
- 9. SYMBOL GRID BRILL (DIM, M1, M2, BRT)
- 1. FUNCTIONS 1 L 0 CHART
. BRILL (DIM, M1, M2, BRT)
- 2. RADAR 1
- 3. FUNCTION KEY 1
- 4. FUNCTION KEY 2
- 5. FUNCTION KEY 3
- 6. FUNCTION KEY 4
- 7. RADAR (1, 2) *
- 8. ANCHOR WATCH i- 1. FUNCTIONS 2
~ 9. INTER SWITCH (Requires RJ-7 or 8) - 2. ANCHOR WATCH (OFF, ON)
L 0. FUNCTIONS 3 - 3. ALARM (OFF, ON)
- 4. ALARM RANGE (x.xxx NM)
L 5. HISTORY (OFF, ON)
FUNCTIONS 3
- 1. FUNCTIONS 2
~ 2. INITIAL SETTING (Avilable by special operation)
L 3. TEST

RADAR 1
- 1. FUNCTIONS 2 RADAR 2
- 2. EBL1 (REL, TRUE)* - 1. RADAR 1
- 3. EBL2 (REL, TRUE)* “
2. CURSOR, EBL (REL, TRUE)
- 6. TRAIL (REL, TRUE) - 3. NOISE REJ (OFF, ON)
- 7. TRAIL GRAD (SGL, MULT) - 4. STERN MARK (OFF, ON) *
- 8. [PULSE WD 1] "
5. SHIP’S MARK (OFF, ON)
- 9. [PULSE WD 2] - 6. GUARD ALARM (IN, OUT)*
L 0. RADAR 2
"
7. KEY BEEP (L, M, H) *
“
8. AUDIO ALARM (L, M, H)
L 9. RADAR NO. (1, 2)
MN-1
FUNCTION KEY MENU
FUNCTION KEY 1
- 1. FUNCTIONS 2
- 2. FUNCTION (FUNC1, RIVER, BUOY, SHIP, SHORT,
LONG, CRUISING, HARBOR, COAST,
OCEAN, ROUGH SEA)
- 3. INT REJECT (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
- 4. ECHO STRETCH (OFF, 1, 2)
- 5. ECHO AVERAGE (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
- 6. A/C AUTO (OFF, ON)
-7. FUNC 1 PULSE WD - 1. FUNCTION KEY 1, 2 or 3
I- 8. NOISE REJ (OFF, ON) - 2. 0.5 NM (S1, S2)
- 3. 0.75 NM (S1, S2)
- 4. 1.5 NM (S1, S2, M1)
- 5. 3 NM (S1, S2, M1)
- 6. 6 NM (M1, M2, L)
L 7. 12-24 NM (M2, L)
FUNCTION KEY 2, 3
- 1. FUNCTIONS 2
- 2. FUNC KEY 2 or 3 (PICTURE/OPERATION)
- 3. FUNCTION (FUNC2/3, RIVER, BUOY, SHIP, SHORT,
LONG, CRUISING, HARBOR, COAST,
OCEAN, ROUGH SEA)
- 4. INT REJECT (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
- 5. ECHO STRETCH (OFF, 1, 2)
- 6. ECHO AVERAGE (OFF, 1, 2, 3)
- 7. A/C AUTO (OFF, ON)
- 8. FUNC 2/3 PULSE WD
L 9. NOISE REJ (OFF, ON)

FUNCTION KEY 4
- 1. FUNCTIONS 2
- 2. FUNC KEY 4 (OPERATION, WATCH ALARM) - 1. FUNCTION2
L 3. ALARM INTERVAL (6, 10, 12, 15, 20 MIN) - 2. FUNC KEY 2/3
(PICTURE/OPERATION)
L 3. OPERATION
. .
(HU, HUTB, CU NU TM,
TRAIL; CU,
TM RESET; OFF CENTER ,
IDX LINES, CURSOR OFFSET,
ECHO STRETCH1 ,
ECHO STRERTCH2,
PLS WD1, PLS WD2,
ECHO AVG 1 , ECHO AVG2,
ECHO AVG3, ECHO COLOR ,
TRAIL BRILL, PANEL BRILL,
CHAR BRILL, NOISE REJ,
TARGET DATA , CANCEL)

MN-2
 PLOT MENU
ARPA 1
- 1. AUTO ACQ (OFF, ON)
- 2. AUTO ACQ AREA (3, 6 NM, SET)
"
3. GUARD ZONE (OFF, ON)
-4. GUARD ZONE SET
- 5. REF TARGET VECT (OFF, ON)
- 6. CPA/TCPA WARNING (OFF, ON)
- 7. HISTORY DOTS (5, 10, 20)
- 8. HISTORY INTERVAL (30S, 1, 2, 3, 6 MIN)
-9. AUDIO ALARM (ON, OFF)
I- 0. ARPA 2 - 1. ARPA 1
- 2. TRAIL MODE (STATIC, DYNAMIC)
- 3. MARK SIZE (STANDARD, LARGE)
EPA - 4. DISPLAY BCR/BCT (OFF, ON)
1 CPA/TCPA WARNING (OFF, ON)
CPA 0.0NM
"
5. ZET VECT TGT DATA (REL, TRUE)
TCPA 00.0 MIN - 6. GZ/AZ STABILIZED (NORTH, CRT)
2 MARK SIZE (STD, LARGE) - 7. SPEED REF (WT, BT) *
3 PLOT NO. (OFF, ON) - 8. INPUT SIG CHECK
4 REL VECT TGT DATA (REL, TRUE) - 9. ARP TRACK TEST
5 AUDIO ALARM (OFF, ON) L 0. ARP INITIAL SETTING
NAV

NAV INFORMATION 1
- 1. RADAR MAP
- 2. SELECT NAVAID (GPS+LC, DEAD RECKONING)
- 3. OWN SHIP POSN (OFF, LA)
- 4. POSN r- 21.. NAV INFORMATION 1
WPT (OFF, ON)
- 5. +CURSOR DATA (OFF, LA) - 4. WPT LINE (OFF, ON)
- 6. WPT DATA (OFF, REL*, TRUE*) ~ 5.WPT NO. (OFF, ON)
- 7. WAY POINT L 8. ARRIVAL ALARM (OFF, ON)
- 8. NAV LINE
- 9. WIND DATA (OFF, ON) - 1. NAV INFORMATION 1
L 0. NAV INFORMATION 2 - 2. NAV LINE (OFF, ON)
- 4. NAV WIDTH (OFF, ON)
JAV INFORMATION 2 - 5. WPT NO. (OFF, ON)
- 1. NAV INFORMATION 1
L 9. TURNING LINE (OFF, ON, REVISED)
- 2. WIND GRAPH (OFF, ON)
"
3. WIND UNIT (M, S, KT)
- 4. CURRENT DATA (OFF, ON)
- 5. CURRENT GRAPH (OFF, ON)
- 6. DEPTH DATA (OFF, ON) NAV INFORMATION 3
- 7. DEPTH GRAPH (OFF, ON) - 1. NAV INFORMATION 2
- 8. DEPTH SCALE (10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500) - 2. WATER TEMP (OF, ON)
- 9. DEPTH UNIT (M, FT, FA) L 3. DATE (OFF, UTC, LOCAL)
L 0. NAV INFORMATION 3

MN-3
INITIAL SETTING MENU
INITIAL SETTING 1
- 1. FUNCTIONS 2
- 2. HD ALIGN
"
3. TIMING ADJ
-4. ANT HEIGHT (6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 35M, MORE)
- 5. LOG PULSE (200P, NM)
- 6. OWN SHIP INFORMATION - 1. INITIAL SETTING 1
- 7. UNIT (NM, SM, KM) * - 2. SHIP'S LENGTH
- 8. ON TIME - 3. SHIP' S WIDTH
-9. TX TIME - 4. RADAR POSN
L- 0. INITIAL SETTING 2 " 6. TURN RATE

L 7. SPEED RATE
INITIAL SETTING 2
- 1. INITIAL SETTING 1
- 2. LOG GYRO INPUT (LOG, GYRO)
- 3. TYPE (R, N, G, D)
-4. KEY BEEP (OFF, ON)*
- 5. SCANNER STOPPED (ST-BY, TX)
- 6. VIDEO SIGNAL (ANLG, DGTL)
- 7. ALARM LEVEL (4, 5, 6, 7)
- 8. DISPLAY (MAIN, SUB)
-9. SECTOR BLKG (OFF, ON)
LQ. INITIAL SETTING 3
INITIAL SETTING 3
- 1. INITIAL SETTING 2
- 2. TRAIL RESTART (OFF, ON)
" 3. ECHO AVG W/O GYRO (OFF, ON)
-4. HEAD UP TB SCALE (OFF, ON)
- 5. CTR ECHO STRETCH (ST-BY, TX)
- 6. VIDEO CONTRAST (1, 2, 3, 4)
- 7. MAXIMUM RANGE (72, 96, 120) *
- 8. ECHO FULL COLOR (OFF, ON) *
-9. INDEX LINES (S, 3, 6)
LQ. INITIAL SETTING 4
INITIAL SETTING 4
- 1. INITIAL SETTING 3
- 2. MODEL (FR-2815/2825, OTHER X-BAND, S-BAND)
- 4. SHIPS TYPE (DEEP SEA, OTHERS)
-5. RJ-7 (OFF, ON)
- 6. RJ-8 (OFF, ON)
- 9. CABLE L. (500, 5000M)
L 0. FACTORY DEFAULT

MN-4
 MODEL F R/F A R - 2 8 0 5 S E R I E S
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST U N I T D I S P L A Y U N I T RDP -1 1 5 PAGE

-2
1996 REF. DWG C3418- E01- M-1
SYMBOL PARTS NAME T Y P E / D W G. N O CODE N O. R E M A R K S
1 HOOD 03 133-1901-2
-133 -
100 233 -842
442

-- ---620
2
3
FILTER
CARD COVER (1)
03
03
--126--1231-2
1241-0
100-232
100 220
4
5
GASKET
MONITOR PANEL
86
03
-003-1105-2
--133-1201-3
100 214
100 232
752
- -830
753

- --782
NAME PLATE (PANEL) 03 133-1209-0 -
100 232

-133-1202--1
6 PANEL FIXING PLATE (3) 03 -133-1204 2 100 232
7
8
PANEL FIXING PLATE (1)
MEMORY CARD FIXING PLATE
03
03 133-1146-1
-133
-- --741
100 232
100 232
761

--133--1302
--- ---461
9 LEFT COVER 03 -2 100 232 882
LEFT COVER (P) 03 1912-1 100 233
10 RIGHT SIDE PLATE 03 --133-1101-3
133-1102-2
100 232 373
LEFT SIDE PLATE 03 -- --392
100 232 382

---133
REAR PLATE 03 133-1103-2 100 232
-1104-2
--- ---422
BOTTOM PLATE 03 100 232 402
CRT FIXING PLATE (1) 03 133-1105-1 100 232 411

---133
CRT FIXING PLATE (2) 03 133-1106-2 100 232

-- -451
SUPPORT PLATE
CRT SUPPORT PLATE
03
03
-1107-2
133-1108-1
100 232 -432
100 232 441
SOCKET CLAMP PLATE 03 -133-1109-1 - -
100 232
CRT SUPPORT PLATE
HANDLE FIXING PLATE
03
03
-133
--133 -1111-1
133-1134- 1
- -461
100 232
- -581
100 232
FIXING ANGLE (2)
CLAMP FIXING PLATE
03
03 --133
-1135-1
133-1151-0
- -591
100 232
- -690
100 232

-133--1152--1
FIXING ANGLE (2) 03 1136 1 - -601
100 232
DUCT PLATE 03 - -551
100 233
11 COVER SPONGE (1) 03-133-1153-0 100-232-700
12 COVER SPONGE (2) 03-133-1154-0 100-232-710
13 SPACER SQ -25 000-801-870
14 PDM PCB PROTECTIVE COVER 03-106-1143-1 100-159-841
16 TOP COVER 03-133-1303-2 100-232-892
TOP COVER CP) 03-133-1913-1 100-233-471
17 PCB CHASSIS (1) 03-133-1121-2 100-232-472
PCB CHASSIS (2) 03-133-1122-2 100-232-482
PCB CHASSIS (3) 03-133-1123-1 100-232-491
19 STAY 03-133-1148- 1 100-232-671
20 PCB SUPPORT PLATE 03-133-1124- 2 100-232-502
PCB SUPPORT RUBBER 03-133-1125-0 100-232-510
21 PCB FIXING PLATE 03-133-1127-2 100-232-532
23 REAR COVER 03-133-1306-1 100-232-921
REAR COVER (P) 03-133-1916-0 100- 233-510
25 CLAMP PLATE 03-001-1116-0 300-111-160
26 COVER CONTACT PLATE 03-133-1133-1 100-232-571
27 CABLE CLAMP 03-001-1115-1 300-111-151
28 CLAMP FIXING PLATE 03-133-1145-2 100-232-732
29 DUCT (2) 03-133-1143-1 100-232-661
30 DUCT (1) 03-133-1142 2- 100-232-652
31 POWER FIXING PLATE - - -
03 133 1126 1 100-232-521
32
33
FAN FIXING PLATE (1)
SPACER
-- - -
03 133 1129 1
HSA 3015
100-232-551
000-803-015

--- --- ---

34 POWER FIXING PLATE 03 123 1371 3 100-204- 273
35 SHIELD COVER 03 123 1372 2 100-204-282
36 PCB FIXING DUCT 03 133 1141 2 100-232-642
37
37
RIGHT SIDE COVER
RIGHT SIDE COVER (P)
- -- --
03 133 1301 2
-
03 133 1911 1
100-232-872
100-233-451

- --
38
39
FILTER FIXING PLATE
FUSE FIXING PLATE
-
-
-
03 133 1149 2
03 133 1128 1
100-232-682
-
100 232-541
40 FAN FIXING PLATE (2) - - -
03 133 1131 1 -
100 232 561 -
---
03-133-1401-3
---
41 MOUNTING BASE (1) 100 232 933
42 COVER FIXING PLATE 03-133-1138-1 100 232 621
43 FRONT COVER (1) 03-133-1304-2 100 232 902
-
FRONT COVER 1 (P) 03-133-1914-1 -
100 233 501 -
FRONT COVER (2) 03-133-1305-1 -
100 232 911 -
- 03-133-1915-0
---
FRONT COVER 2 (P)
03-133-1402-2
100 233 480 -
44
45
MOUNTING BASE (2)
PANEL FIXING PLATE (2) 03-133-1203-2
100 232 942
100 232 772
-
-
46 POWER SW SHEET (J ) -
03 133-1211 0 - -
100 232 850 -
UN I T D I S P L A Y U N I T R D P-1 1 5 REF. DWG C 3418 - E 01 - PAGE M- 2
SYMBOL P A R T S N A M E T Y P E / D W G. N O CODE N O. R E M A R K S

47
POWER SW SHEET (E)
PANEL FIXING PLATE (4)
-- -- --
03 133 1221 0
03 133 1208 0 -- ---
-
100 232 860
100 232 820
48 100 232 920
 MODEL F R/F A R — 2805
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST U N I T CONTROL UNIT PAGE

1996 - 8 REF. DWG -

C3404 EOl A - -
M 3
SYMBOL PARTS NAME T Y P E/D W G. N O C O D E N O. R E M A R K S
133-1922-1
--133
1 BOTTOM PLATE 03 100-238-271
2 CABLE COVER 03 -1613
1604-1 - -
100 233 031
3
4
RETAINER
CLAMP PLATE
03
03
--133-1615--40
133 - 100-235-914
- -
100 235 930
5 TRACKBALL COVER 10 -044-3104-0 100-111-920
6
7
TRACKBALL
SPACER
EUA - FTF 814 B
4 X 3 SPCC
- -
000 115 533
000-877-016
8 KNOB (SMALL) - -
03 133 1661 0 - - -
100 239 920

-- -- --
9 SLIDE PLATE (L) 03 133 1669 0 100-242-340
10 SPONGE (2) 03 133 1607 1 - -
100 233 061
11 INSULATING PLATE 03-133-1617-0 100-235-950
12 KEY ADAPTOR 03-044-1418 100-155-460
13 KEYTOP 03-024-9109-1 100-074-171
14 GASKET FIXING PLATE 03-133-1616-0 100-235-940
15 SPONGE (1) 03-133-1606-0 100-233-050
16
17
DIAL
SPACER -
03 133-1608-4
03- 032-9112-1
03-133-1605-1
100-233-074
100-104-741
18 PANEL FIXING MATERIAL 100- 233-041
19 CENTER CHASSIS 03-133-1601-2 100-233-002
20 SPACER HSA -3015 000-803-015
21 LEFT CHASSIS 03-133-1602-3 100- 233-013
22
23
SIDE PANEL (1)
LEFT SW FILM (E) -
03 133-1609-1
03- 133-1626-3
03-133-1623-3
100-233-081
100- 233-163
LEFT SW FILM (J ) 100-233-133
24
25
GUIDING PLATE
SW FILM 1 (E) -
03 133-1618-3
03- 133-1682-2
100-235-963
100-233-362

26
SW FILM 1 (J)
CONTROL UNIT PANEL -
03 133-1681-2
03-133-1671- 5
100-233-352
100-233-275
03-133-1921-1
28 LID (1) ASSEMBLY 03 133-1672-4 100- 233-284
29
30
CONTROL UNIT MOUNTING PLATE
CR SPONGE -133-1683-0
03-
100-233-491
-
100 244-510
31
32
LID ASSEMBLY
(2)
RP BLIND FILM
03-133-1673-4
03-133-1636-0
100
100
--233--490
244
294

--- ---940
33 RP FLIM (E) 03-133-1635-0 100 244480
RP FILM (J ) 03-133-1634-0 100 244470
34 COVER 03-133-1665-0 100 239
35 SLIDE PLATE (1) 03-133-1666-0 100- --950
239
36
37
SLIDE PLATE (2)
RIGHT SW FILM 1 (J)
03-133-1667-0
03-133-1622-4 -- -960
100
100
239
233124
38 GUID PLATE (R) 03-133-1663-1 -- --931
100 239
39 RIGHT CHASSIS (2) 03-133-1631-3 100 233183
40 SIDE PANEL (2) 03-133-1611-1 - -091
100 233
41 NYLON PUSH RIVET FNRP3 X4•5 000-865-858
100-233-172
---
42 PROTECTIVE COVER ( E) -
03 133 1627 2 -
42
43
PROTECTIVE COVER
PM SEAL
(J )
--
03 133 1624 2
03 133 1612-1
- 100-233-142
100-233-101
44
47
KNOB (S >
SLIDE PLATE (R)
- -
05 036 0104 0
-- -
03 133 1668-0
- 100-101-850
100-242-330
48 BOTTOM PLATE -
03 133 1603 5 - 100-233-025
FURUNO Model FR-2115/2125 RSB-0074 /0075
mtm&m Unit •sO Page
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST SCANNER UNIT M-4
98 #- 7M .
Ref Dwg. C3464-E04-
SYMBOL NAME NAME TYPE CODE No. REMARKS
pi 3-r ## mm
A101 $§ t4 nBfti_U.qp RADIATOR ASSY. XN20AF 008-485-260
RADIATOR ASSY. XN24 AF 100-485-270
A110 U — F X -f "j REED SWITCH MOUNT RSK -2108 361-121-081
A114 MOTOR FIXING PLATE 03-001-3231 300-132-317
A115 X
^ + f — ts / Y —
~
SCANNER COVER 03-001-3261 300-132-613
A117 A 7 ^r > f f £ X CABLE CLAMPING FLANGE 03-001-3213 300-132-131
A118 i i X +r v V PACK ING JISF8801 25C 000-864-901
A119 f) X >T 7 V PACK ING JISF8801 25C 000-804-901
A120 U " j ± - 3- x ~ > CHAIN ST-16 000-841-394
A 123 ANTENNA FIXING PLATE 03-144-3201 100-264-100
A 126 V J
' > A V-RING VR-120A 000-850-738
A127 SCANNER HOUSING 03-001-3212 300-132-123
A 128 SCANNER COVER 03-001-3261 300-132-613
A 129 KEY 7X7X 23 000-866-851
'
A130 V? h MAGNET RP-1757 MS4 X 9 X 15 000-499-055
» *
7
A131 t (S b f t if £ TURNING GEAR FLANGE RSI -2002 360-920-021
A132 (D GUIDE RAIL SHIM ( 1 ) RSK-2402 361-124-021 2 pcs.
A 133 ± > +F
j (1) GUIDE RAIL SHIM ( 2) RSK-2403 361-124-031 2 pcs.
A134 SLIDE R A I L RSK-2401 361-124-011 2 pcs.
A135 ROTARY JOINT RSB-0074 /0075 008-487-200
iy - Jl J >7 03-001-3222
A136
'
t y a- A
SEAL RING 300-132-221
A 301 RF RF MODULE RTR-062 008-487-160
RF ^E 's i . - J I* RF MODULE RTR-063 008-487-170
sy j >y
BG101 ' ' BEARiNG 6013 ZZ 000-802-338
BG102 s <T V > BEAR ING 6013ZZ 000-802-338
G101 DRIVE GEAR 03-001-3232 300-132-334
G102 SCANNER TURING GEAR 03-001-3243 300-132-412
GK106 A- > GASKET 03-001-3263 300-132-631
GK 107 77 m a x'! v h GASKET JISF8801 25C 000-804-901
GK 108 r > COVER GASKET 03-001 -3263 300-132-631
 FURUNO Mode I FR-2115/ 2125 RTR-062A/063
mmi & m Unit RF ^E y i- JI/ Page
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST RF MODULE M-5
7B .
Ref Dwg.
SYMBOL
^
98
NAME NAME
C 3464-E05-,
TYPE CODE No. REMARKS
IB# -r ## mm
K A-
1
2 * SHIELD COVER
WARNNING LABEL
03-144-5109
14-055-4202
100-266-810
100-245-220
3 =1 CABLE TIE CV-70 000-570324
4 BN-NH 3 77 BH-NH CONNECTOR 03-1900 ( 77>-3P ) 008-486-880
5 FETf¥ £ *®
A FET FIXING PLATE 03-144-5107 100-264-190
6 (II) VH-ML T' 7 7 VH-ML CONNECTOR ASSY. 03-1903 008-486-910
7 (II) NH 3 T' 7 7 NH CONNECTOR ASSY. 03-1904 008-486-920
8 2 -7 >7 °
CLAMP CKS-07-H 000-570-259
9 77 > -
7” (r - 7 AMP CASE 03-144-5102 100-264-130
10 NUT PLATE 03-126-5324 100-246-470
11 MIC 77 7 7° 7 — MIC ADAPTER 03-006-5301 300-653-012
12 -
RF > -v — v RF CHASSIS 03-144-5101 100-264-120
13 ffic& v - F HEAT SINK SHEET 03-144-5106 100-264-180
14
15
^
MD ISIVMIS MD PCB FIXING PLATE
AMP COVER
03-144-5105
03-144-5103
100-264-170
100-264-140
16 MIC 77 7 7° 7 — MIC ADAPTER 03-126-5321 100-242-310
 FURUNO Model FR-2125W
Uni t RSB-0076/77/78 Page
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST SCANNER UNIT M-5A
99 # 1E .
Ref Dwg. C3466-E01-
SYMBOL NAME NAME TYPE CODE No. REMARKS
E# pfion-S mm
A101 IslKf OB&S-ILPO RADIATOR ASSY. XN-12AF 008-485-250 123cm
XN-20AF 008-485-260 200cm
XN-24 AF 008-485-270 240cm
A 105 ROTARY JOINT ASSEMBLY RSB-0076/77/78 008-487-200
A107 rsftWLtt -k ANTENNA BRACKET 03-144-3201 100-264-100
A108 7'sffW. i' fia Iflpo ANTENNA BRACKET ASSY. RSB-0074/0075 008-487-190
A109 v-AU >7' SEAL RING 03-001-3222 300-132-221
A110 1)i- COLOR 03-022-3106 100-113-081
A111 ANTENNA TURNING GEAR 03-022-3103 100-113-052
A112 MAGNET RP-1757 MS4X 9X-15 000-499-055
All 3 MAGNET FIXING PLATE 03-022-3105 100-113-070
A114 TURNING GEAR FLANGE RSI -2002 360-920-021
A115 vj> r V-RING VR-120A 000-850-738
A116 SCANNER HOUSING 03-023-3007 100-126-540
A117 mm (2) BLIND PLATE ( 2) 03-022-3402 100-113-250
A118 mm d ) BLIND PLATE ( 1 ) 03-022-3401 100-113-240
A119 vA-&mi3 rf - SENSOR COVER 03-022-3503 100-133-280 FOR DE- ICE
J-rXfyTlStt ® 03-022-3107 100-113-090
A 120
' REED SWITCH FIXING PLATE
A121 n W. G. GUIDE 03-001-5303 300-153-032
A 122 anas
- WAVEGUIDE 03-023-3002 100-112-981
A123 WG® tt « (1 ) W. G. FIXING PLATE ( 1) 03-023-3003 100-112-991
A124 WGlXft ® (2 ) W. G. FIXING PLATE ( 2) 03-023-3004 100-113-000
A 125 WGffiM® ( 3) W. G. FIXING PLATE ( 3) 03-023-3005 100-113-010
A 126 E-CORNER WAVEGUIDE 03-023-3001 100-112-970
A 127 t- mm HEATER RETAINER 03-022-3502 100-113-270
A128 fc-SISttn HEATER FIXING BASE 03-022-3501 100-113-260
A129 CABLE GLAND JIS F8801 000-870-050
A133 SNl "As
\° SW PACKING 03-006-3213 300-632-131
A134 SE MOUNTING PLATE 03-006-3215 300-632-150
A135 74+tSWM SW COVER 03-006-3216 300-632-160
A136 V -IWT-'A&ZL BALL CHAIN TM-14-B-CR No. 2 000-841-373
A 137
A 138
SII
swi'*M *> A* 7 SWITCH COVER PACKING
SW POSITION PLATE
03-005-3225
03-006-3217
300-532-250
300-632-171
A140 MOTOR FIXING PLATE GUIDE 03-001-3291 300-132-910
A 141 WASHER 03-022-3203 100-113-140
|A142 DRIVING GEAR 03-022-3202 100-113-130
A143 WMfiA - GEAR COVER 03-022-3204 100-113-150
A144 sRcaift ® SCR FIXING PLATE 03-022-3504 100-113-291
A145 SCR COVER 03-022-3505 100-120-870
A146 PC BOARD FIXING PLATE 03-022-3301 100-113-221
A 147 liU 7 -7 STB-3 LABEL ( STB3 ) 03-022-3211 100-113-210
 |Page M- £B
SYMBOL NAME NAME TYPE CODE No . REMARKS
E# 3-K ##
14 »;7- LABEL ( STB2)
A 148
A 149 Tsf '
^ STB-2
sfMfjyx. CAPACITOR FIXING PLATE
03-022-3209
03-022-3302
100-113-200
100-113-231 FOR 1P MOT
A150 PHOTO BLANKER 03-022-3213 100-120-860
A151 BOSS 03-022-3212 100-120-850
A 152 FAN 03-022- 3205 100-113-161
A153 7 (1) FAN COVER ( 1 ) 03-022-3207 100-113-183
A154 (2) FAN COVER ( 2) 03-022-3208 100-113-192
A 155
A156
Xttf in* -
»;
- SCANNER COVER
HOOK
03-011-3261
03-001-3264
300-132-612
300-132-640
A157 Qrjft-fi — / CHAIN ST-16 000-841-394
A158 SMltfeli S-TYPE CIRCLIP ISTW-8 000-801-454
A159 A Jt- fa fA
' - HELECAL INSERT COIL M8 X1.5D 000-867-635
BG101 BEARING 6013ZZ PS 2S 000-802-338
BT101 HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT 03-001-3262 300-132-622
GK103 hiv -ffliV -Ay PACK ING 03-001-3263 300-132-631
 MODEL FR - 2 8 2 2 X/ 5 2 X / 2 5 W/ 5 5 W
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST U N I T S C A N N E R U N I T PAGE

-
1995 11 REF. DWG - -
C 3332 E01
-
M 6
SYMBOL PARTS NAME T Y P E / D W G. N O CODE N O. R E M A R K S

A 100A SCANNER
SCANNER
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
RSB
RSB
-0041
--0043-N
0042- N
- --
008 399 340
008-399 360
220 V,3P
440V,3P
SCANNER
SCANNER
ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
RSB
RSB -0046
-N - -
008 399 380
008-404-630
100V,1P
200 V,IP

A 101 A RADIATOR ASSY. (6.5 FT) XN -3A 008-324-530 200 CM

RADIATOR ASSEMBLY -
XN 4 A 008-324-130 240 CM
ANTENNA RADIATOR ASSEMBLY XN 5 A 008-402-020 300CM
A 102 A FEEDER W.G.ASSEMBLY XN3 A 008-321-280 FOR XN 3 A
FEEDER W.G.ASSEMBLY XN4 A 008-321-270 FOR XN 4 A

-- - -
A
A
103
104
W.G. CLAMP
WAVEGUIDE CLAMP INSULATOR
RSB 2006 1
03 003 4003 0
- 360-220-061
300-340-030
A 105 A ROTARY JOINT ASSEMBLY C 2 P7N 2 N /8 N 2 N 008-320- 520
A 106 BEARING RETAINER RING - -
RSI 2001 0 360-920-010
A
A
107
108
ANTENNA BRACKET
KEY
-- -- --
03 022 3102 2
03 022 3104 0
100-113-042
100-113-060
A 109 SEAL RING - - -
03 001 3222 1 300-132- 221
A 110 COLLAR - - -
03 022 3106 1 100-113-081

A 111 ANTENNA TURNING GEAR 03-022-3103-2 100-113-052

A 112 MAGNET RP -1757 MS4X9 X 15 000-499-055
A 113 MAGNET FIXING PLATE 03-022-3105-0 100-113-070
A 114 TURNING GEAR FLANGE RSI - 2002-1 360-920-021
A 115 V - RING VR -120A 000-850-738
A 116 SCANNER HOUSING 03-023-3007-0 100-126-540
A 117 BLIND PLATE 03-022-3402-0 100-113- 250
A 118 BLIND PLATE 03-022-3401-0 100-113-240
A 119 SENSOR COVER 03-022-3503-0 100-113-280 -
FOR DE ICE
A 120 REED SWITCH FIXING PLATE 03-022-3107-0 - -
100 113 090

A 121 W.G. GUIDE 03-001-5303-2 300-153-032

A
A
122
123
WAVEGUIDE
W.G.FIXING PLATE Cl) 03
--023--3003--1
03 023 3002 1
100
--112--991
100 112 981
A
A
124
125
W.G.FIXING PLATE(2)
W.G.FIXING PLATE(3)
03
03
--023 -3004-0
023-3005-0
100
100
-113 -000
- --970
113 010
A
A
126
127
-
E CORNER WAVEGUIDE
HEATER RETAINER
03
03
023-3001-0
-022
-022-3502 -0
100
100
-112
--113-270
A
A
128
129
HEATER FIXING BASE
CABLE GLAND
03 - - 3501-0
JIS F 8801 A 30B BRASS
100
000
113-260
-870-050
A 133 SW PACKING - -
03 006 3213 1 - 300-632-131
300-632-150
A
A
134
135
SW MOUNTING PLATE
SW COVER
-- --
03 006 3215 0
-
03 006 3216 0
- 300-632-160
A
A
136
137
BALL CHAIN
SWITCH COVER PACKING
-- ---
TM 14 B CR NO.2
--
03 005 3225 0
- --
000 841 373
300-532 250
A 138 SW POSITION PLATE - -
03 006 3217 1 - -
300 632 171
A 140 MOTOR FIXING PLATE GUIDE - - -
03 001 3291 0 - -
300 132 910
A 141 WASHER 03-022-3203-0 100-113-140
A 142 DRIVING GEAR 03-022-3202-0 100-113-130
A 143 GEAR COVER 03-022-3204-0 100-113-150
A 144 SCR FIXING PLATE 03-022-3504- 1 100-113- 291
A 145 SCR COVER 03-022-3505-0 100-120-870
A 146 PC BOARD FIXING PLATE 03-022-3301-1 100-113- 221
A 147 LABEL (STB3) 03-022-3211-0 100-113-210
A 148 LABEL (STB 2) 03-022-3209-0 100-113- 200
A 149 CAPACITOR FIXING PLATE 03-022-3302-1 100-113- 231 FOR IP MOT
A 150 PHOTO BLANKER 03-022-3213-0 100-120-860

A 151 BOSS 03-022-3212-0 100-120-850

A 152 FAN 03-022-3205 -1 100-113-161
A 153 FAN COVER (1) 03-022-3207-3 100-113-183
A 154 FAN COVER (2) 03-022-3208-2 100-113-192
A 155 SCANNER COVER 03-001-3261-2 300-132-612
A 156 HOOK 03-001-3264-0 300-132-640
A 157 CHAIN ST-16 000-841-394
A 158 -
S TYPE CIRCLIP ISTW -8 000-801-454
A 159 HELICAL INSERT COIL M 8X 1.5 D - -
000 867 635

BG 101 BEARING 6013ZZ PS 2S 000-802-338

BT 101 HEXAGONAL HEAD BOLT - -

03 001 3262 2 - -
300 132-622
U N I T S C A N N E R U N I T REF. DWG. C 3332- E 01 - P AG E M- 7
SYMBOL P A R T S N A M E T Y P E / D W G. N 0 CODE N O. R E M A R K S

GK
GK
101
102
-
0 RING
-
0 RING
-
AS 568 125, 1115 70
--
AS 568 142 1115 70
-
-
- -
000 851 840
-- --
000 851 855
GK 103 PACKING -
03 001 3263 1- 300 132 631
 MODEL FR/FAR — 2 8 2 5W
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST U N I T TRANSCEIVER RTR-0 4 6 PAGE

-6
1996 REE DWG - -
C 3405 E01 M-8
SYMBOL PARTS NAME T Y P E / D W G. N O CODE N O. R E M A R K S
A 1 BASE - - -
03 130 5101 1 100 -235 -571
A
A 3
2 SEAL PLATE
CABLE CLAMP
- - -
03 130 5105 0
03-010- 5108-3
100
301
235-610
-051
-051--090 083
A
A
4
5
CLAMP PLATE
SPACER
03-010-5109-0
BSB-311
301
000
--807-400
A 6 FUSE FIXING PLATE 03-130- 5103-0 100 -235 -990
590
A
A
7
8
LID (FUSE)
RF CASE
03-130- 5107-0
03-130- 5102-1
100
100
--235 -
235- 581
A 9 RF ASSEMBLY
A 10 BASE 03-130- 5101-0 100-235- 570
FILTER 03-130- 5202-0 100-235-710
A 11 NAME PLATE CTR / RX) 03-800-0651-0 -
100 060- 230
A 12 PIN 03-010- 5104-0 -
301 051 040 -
A
A
13
14
PIN FIXING PLATE
W.G. ASSY.
-- - -1
03 010- 5103-0
03 010 5120
-
301 051 030
--
301 051 201
-
-
CONVERSION FLANGE
WAVE GUIDE (1)
-- -- --
03 010 5121 1
03 010 5122 0
100 235 631
--
100 235 640
--
CHOKE FLANGE
WAVEGUIDE
FOR WRJ -
-
10
RRI 1102 1 -
000 879 252
-
340 911 021
--
A 15 WATERPROOFING FILM RF. - -
03 010 5123 1 - 100-070 631 -
A
A
16
17
POWER COVER
SPACER (3)
--
HSA 4070
-
03 130 5125 1 - --
100 235 691
000 804 070 -
-
A 18 RADIATION PLATE
TR CLAMP
- --
03 130 5121 2
-
03 130 5122 0
-
--
-
100 235 652
--
100 235 660
--
RUBBER CLAMP - -
03 130 5123 1 100 235 671 -
A 19
RADIATION SHEET
SPACER (180)
-
-
--
03 130 5124 0
03 130 5104 0
-- -- --
100 235 680
100 235 600
A 20 SPACER -
BSB 325 - -
000 804 978
A 21 GASKET -
UC 300275 *1M* 000-807-399
 11 R 11 N O MODEL FR - 2 0 5 O X/ 2 8 5 2 X/ 2 8 5 5 W
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST U N I T R T R-0 1 0 TRANSCEIVER PAGE

1995 -11 REF. me, C 3300-003- M-9

SYMBOL PARTS NAME T Y P E/DWG. NO CODE N O. R E M A R K S
A 301 CHASSIS 03-017- 5101 2
03-017-5201-0
- 100-062-072
A 302 COVER 100-062- 270
A
A
303 FAN FIXING PLATE
BLIND PLATE
03-017-5127 0
03-017-5118-0
- 100-070- 550
304 100-062-230
A 305 SHIELD CASE FIXING PLATE 03-017-5125 0 - 100-070-530
A 306 SPONGE -
03-017 5128 0 - 100-070- 560
A 307 PT FIXING PLATE 03-017-5112-0 100-062-170
A 308 HEAT SINK -
03-017 5113-0 100-062-180
A 309 SHIELD CASE -
03-017-5111 2 -
100-062 162
A 310 STOPPER - -
03-017 5117 2 100-062- 222

A 311 CONNECTOR FIXING PLATE 03-017- 5115 -0 100-062- 200

A 312 C A B L E C L A M P ( 1) 03-017- 5109-0 100-062- 150
A 313 BOTTOM PLATE 03-017-5603-1 100-062-741
A 314 S I D E P L A T E ( 1) 03-017- 5601 -1 100-062- 721
A 315 S I D E P L A T E ( 2) 03-017- 5602-1 100-062- 731
A 316 TOP PLATE 03-017-5604-2 -
100 062-752
A 317 GUIDE PLATE 03-017- 5116-0 -
100 062- 210
A 318 METER FIXING PLATE 03-017- 5605 1 - 100-062- 761
A
A
319 FUSE FIXING PLATE 03-017- 5107- 1
03-017- 5108-0
-
100 062- 131
320 COVER 100-062- 140

A 321 AIR F I L T E R C A S E 03-017- 5103- 0 100 -062-090

A 322 AIR FILTER 03-017- 5104 0 - 100-062-100
A 323 FOOT -
03 012-5108- 1 301- 251 -081
A 324 METER FIXING PLATE 03-017- 5106 0 - 100-062-120
A 325 DRAIN WAVEGUIDE (H) 03-017-0360 0 - 100-062-800
A 326 W A V E G U I D E F L A N G E (2) 03-017-5420-4 100-062-554
A 327 LINER 03-017- 5423 0 - 100-070-620
A 328 R E T A I N I N G B A R ( 2) 03-017- 5205 0 - 100-062-310
A 329 E A R T H I N G F I X T U R E (H) 03-017- 5203 0 - 100-062- 290
A 330 C U S H I O N C 2) 03-017- 5207 0 - 100-062-330
A 331 R E T A I N I N G B A R C l) 03-017- 5204 0
03-017- 5202 0
-
-
-
100-062 300
A 332 E A R T H I N G F I X T U R E ( V) -
100-062 280
A 333 C U S H I O N ( 1) 03-017-5206 0 - 100-062-320
A 334 BOLT -
03-017 5208 0 - -
100-062 340
A
A
335
336
SEAL WASHER
SPACER
03-009-3219-0
HSA -3035
-
100-004 550
000-803-035
A 337 SPACER SB-6 M 3-10 BS - 000-877- 113
A 338 S P A C E R ( 2) HSA -3045 000-803-045
A 339 SPACER HSA -3015 000-803-015
A 340 S P A C E R (2) HSA -3010 000-803-010

A 341 TRANSFORMER FIXING PLATE 03-017- 5114 0 - 100-062-190

A
A
342
343
L A B E L (R)
L A B E L CF )
03-017-5611 0
03-017-5122-0
- 100-062-770
100-062- 250
A 344 S T I C K E R ( H I G H V O L T A G E) R -l 2135- D- O 390-100-010
A 345 HOUR METER WINDOW -
03-010 5133 0 - 301-051-330
A 346 NAME PLATE 03-009-0117- 1 300-901 -171
A 347 SPACER HSA -4040 000-804-040
A 348 CLAMP PLATE 03-010-5109-0 301-051-090
A
A
349 BOLT
NYLON RIVET
03-017-5314 0 - 100-062-470
350
-
FNRP 3X6 5 BLACK 000-865-859
A 351 LABEL ( A) 03-017- 5612 100-062- 260
A 352 LABEL (T) 03-017- 5121 1 - 100-062- 241
A 400 A TX M O D U L E RTR -010 008- 234-240
A 401 S I D E P L A T E C l) 03-017- 5301 -4 100-062-354
A 402 BOTTOM PLATE 03-017-5303- 1 100-062-371
A
A
403
404
TOP PLATE
S I D E P L A T E (2 )
03-017-5304 0
03-017- 5302-3
- 100-062-380
100-062-363
A 405 FAN GUIDE 03-017- 5305- 2 -
100 062-392
A 406 SCR FIXING BASE 03-017-5311- 1 100-062- 441
A
A
407 SCR FIXING PLATE -
03 017- 5312-0 100-062- 450
A
408
409
H I N G E (1 )
HINGE FIXING PLATE
03-009-1004- 1
03-017-5126-1
-
300 910-041
100-070- 541
A 410 STOPPER 03-017-5316-0 100-062-490
A 411 BOBBIN FIXTURE 03-017- 5313-0 100-062-460
UNIT RTR-0 1 0 T R A N S C E I V E R REF. DWG. -
C 3300 - 003
-
P A G E M 10
SYMBOL PARTS NAME T Y P E/D W G. N O CODE N O. R E M A R K S
A
A
412
413
MAGNETRON FIXING PLATE
FAN GUARD
- -
03 017 5309
-
109 019 C
-0 100
000
-062-430
102-963
-062
A
A
414
415
SWITCH FIXING PLATE
BOBBIN
- -
03 017 5317
-- - -
03 017 5315
-00 100
100
--062--480
500
A
A
416
417
HEAT SINK
SPACER
GE 50
-- - --00
03 009 1006
000
300
--910
108-677
-060
A
A
418
419
IF AMP CASE LID
IF AMP CASE -- -- --00
03 017 5505
03 017 5504
100
100---062-
062 710
-700
A 420 IF AMP CASE FIXING PLATE -
03 007 5314 100 049-110
A 421 MAGNETRON FLANGE 03-017-5413-0 100-062-540
A 422 WAVEGUIDE FLANGE (1) 03-017-5410-1 100-062-511
A 423 CIRCULATOR FIXING PLATE 03-017-5306-4 100-062-404
A 424 REINFORCEMENT PLATE (2) 03-017-5308-0 100-062-420
A 425 REINFORCEMENT PLATE (1) 03-017-5307-1 100-062-411
A 426 WAVEGUIDE ADAPTOR (2) 03-017-5443-0 100-062-640
A 427 WAVEGUIDE FLANGE (3) 03-017-5430-3 100-062-583
WAVEGUIDE FLANGE (4) 03-017-5440-0 100-062-613
A 428 WAVEGUIDE PLAIN FLANGE 03-017-5502-0 100-062-680
A 429 SHIELD CASE 03-017-5501-0 100-062-670
A 430 MIC ADAPTOR 03-017-5503-0 100-062-690
A 431 FILTER WAVEGUIDE 03-011- 5342-0 100-062-650
A 432 FILTER 03-011-5343-1 100-062-661
A 433 LABEL 03-017- 5131-0 100-070-610
A 434 LABEL 03-017-5129-0 100-070-600

--402
A 435 STICKER (HIGH VOLTAGE) R -12135-D -0 390 100-010
A 436 LABEL 6 03-004-0206-2 300 -062
A
A
437
438
SPACER
SPACER
HSA -4095
SB8M4-15- BS
000
000
--877
804-095
-111
A 439 SPACER (2) HSA -3010 000 -803-010
A 440 SPACER (3) HSA -4015 000-804-015
A 441 GROMMET NG -79-0 30 X 25 X 20X8 000-871-215
A 442 GROMMET NG -79- K 000-871-211
 FURUNO Model FR -2135S/FR -2835S
Unit txD
Page
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST SCANNER UNIT M // -
2001
SYMBOL NAME
8R
^ Ref.Dwg.
NAME
C3469-E01-A
TYPE CODE No. REMARKS
13# SBnBn £ =#K ## 11#

A 100A SCANNER HOUSING RSB-0026-066-N 008-493-470

RSB-0026-066-1 008-493-480
RSB-0026-066-N-HK 008-493-490
RSB-0026-066-I -HK 008 -493- 500
RSB-0031-066-N 008-493-510
RSB-0031-066- 1 008-493-520
RSB-0031-066-N-HK 008-493- 530
RSB-0088-066-N 008-525-300
RSB-0088-066- I 008-525-400
RSB-0089-066-N 008-525-050
RSB-0089-066-I 008-525-060
RSB-0090-066- N 008-525-070
RSB-0089-066-I 008-525-080
A 101A ANTENNA RADIATOR ASSY . SN5AF 008-243-630
ANTENNA RADIATOR ASSY. SN7AF 008-243-650
A103 ANTENNA BRACKET 03-015-3213 100-090-540
A105A OHIiiS ROTARY JOINT ASSY . RSB-0026/27/31 008- 243-590
A106 h HELI-SERT M10-1.5X1DNS 000-801-591
A107 CHOKE GUIDE 03-015-3235 100-090-740
A108 BALL BEARING 6809VV 000-801-590
A109 0 U > 7' O-RING JISB2401- 1A-G65 000-851- 310
A110 HSP @I£ U 7 - ? LABEL 03-029-0202 100-091-100
A111 y f -
> y 17 h MAIN SHAFT 03-015-3214 100-090-550
A 112 v - JUU > <7 SEAL RING 03-015-3215 100-090-560
A113
A114 *U-> 7
V
KEY
V-RING
03-015-3216
VR - 130A
100-090-570
000-850-739
A115
A116
K7
s< 77 V > 7
'J BEARING FIXING PLATE
BEARING
03-011-3218
6014ZZ
100-049-531
000-873-273
A117 SPACER (1) 03-015-3217 100-090-580
A118 GEAR BOX 03-015-3212 100-090-530
A119 X 75> S . 1. BLIND PLATE 03-006-3293 300-632-920
IA120 HEATER BRACKET 03-006- 3293 300-632-930
|A121 SCANNER TURNING GEAR 03-015-3226 100-090-660
IA122 z' v - y - p ) SPACER ( 2) 03-015-3218 100-090-590
IA123 BEARING 6014ZZ 000-873-273
JA 124 77
^ h 7 BRACKET 03-015-3219 100-090-600
A125 1S#«(1) TIMING GEAR 03-015-3223 100-090-630
'YT7 U > 7 7 '7 t BEARING WASHER
7
A 126 AW -13X 000-809-969
A. T U > 7l t y h
' '
A127 BEARING NUT AN-13 000-800-968
|A128
|A129
77
^ 7 FIX # ® MAGNET FIXING PLATE
SPACER
03-015-3225
SB8M4-10-BS
100-090-650
000-655-988
|A130 ^t 751 .1. BLIND PLATE 03-011-3224 100-049-580
SA131A — 7 IX # a HEATER MOUNTING BASE 03-011-3501 100-049-940 FOR DE-ICER
x® HEATER SUPPORTING PLA103-006-3282 300-632-820 FOR DE -ICER
<J - KUSItHLP HEATE LEAD WIRE OUTLET 03-006-3283 300-632-830 FOR DE-ICER
A 132 SENSOR COVER 03-006-3219 300-632- 190 FOR DE -ICER
A133 SENSOR BRACKET RSR- 2112 361-821-120
 Page M IZ -
SYMBOL NAME NAME TYPE CODE No. REMARKS
® pnp £ 3-r ## If #
A134 Ji Ditto KEY 03-015-3224 100-090-640
A135 PC BOARD FIXING PLATE 03-015-3222 100-090-620
A137 to - 7
"
ILSWlXttT > 7 THERMAL SWITCH FIXING PLA RSR -2114
7 '
361-821-140
A139A ssss WAVEGUIDE ADAPTOR 03-01-3301 100-049-680
mm CONDUCTOR 03-015-3301 100-090-760
A140 CENTERING MATAL 03-011-3225 100-049-591
A141 x to + SCANNER CHASSIS 03-015-3201 100-090-480
A160 to — 7 — toA — MOTOR COVER 03-015-3101 100-090-450
A161 r> MOTOR COVER GASKET 03-015-3102 100-090-460
A 162A X to + to — SWU SW COVER 03-006-3216 300-632-160
SW1 A'74 > SWITCH COVER GASKET 03-005-3225 300-532- 250

A163
—
SWX -T > > A
—
to 1L 51 x > $15L SWITCH COVER CHAIN
SW POSITION PLATE
TM-14-B-CR NO.2 000-841-376
03-006-3217 300-632-171
X to -V to - SWSXtt
A164
A165 SW Tv to > ^SW MOUNTING PLATE
SW PACKING
03-006- 3215
03-006-3213
300-632-150
300-632-131
A166 .
rin
/
CABLE GLAND JIS F8801 A 30B 000-870-050
Kil #lto 7
A167
A168 T-
^x m CABLE GLAND
EARTH BOLT
JISF8801 A 25C 000-870-151
03-011-3226 100-049-601
A169 15Tie' ll' h COVER FIXTURE BOLT 03-015-3103 100-090-470
A 170 d' A 9 7 v T RUBBER WASHER 03-011-3105 100-049-360
T 7 P > J$ :
A 171
A172
^ TEFLON WASHER
WASHER
03-011-3106
03-011-3104
100-057-100
100-049-350
A173 l3 rt ~ COVER 03-011-3101 100-049-320
A174 / \° 7 A- > COVER GASKET 03-011-3102 100-049-330
A175 7}Hi h COVER FIXING BOLT 03-011-3103 100-049-340
A177 IHr. CIRCULATOR FIXING BOLT 03-015-3204 100-090-510
A178 wm -pxf 100-090-520
A179
* FIXING ANGLE
LIFTING FIXTURE
03 015-3211
-

03-015-3241 100-095-230
A180 PIN 03-011-3206 100-049-421
Aisi RTBftS U 7 - 7 LABEL 03-029-0201 100-091-090
A 182 N V If — h 3 T HELICAL INSERT COIL M 8 X 105 D 000 -867-635
'
A 183 DRIVE GEAR RETAINER 03-015-3225 100-090-680
A184 mmmm DRIVE GEAR 03-015-3227 100-090-670
A185 to - 7 1x1 - « MOTOR FIXING PLATE 03-015-3229 100-090-690
A186
A187
^
14S' to to 1L h POSITIONING BOLT
HEAT SINK
03-015-3231
03-016-5105
100-090- 700
100-050-000
A188 7 7' 7 7 1x1 « ADAPTER FIXING PLATE 03-012-3202 100-062-970
JA189 y x" 7° x ADAPTER FOR MUGNETROI 03-012-3201 100-062-961
IA190
jA 191
7 r > to A — FAN MOTOR COVER 03-012-3204
SPACER FOR FAN MOTOR 03-012-3203
100-062-990
100-062-980
IA 192 ROPE -
°
4 f 600MM* 000-835-320
A *
{ A193 to 7 y;> 15' COUPLING STB-01 SUS 000-844-165
A194 fcf > PIN 03-015-3232 100-090- 710
A195 X 7 toll BLIND PLATE 03-015-3202 100-090-490
A196
JA197 X 77 7 h
=
X > 3 - 7"1X1 « ENCODER FIXING PLATE
MAGNET
03-015-3221 100-090-610
RP-1757 MS4X9X1 000-499-055
i

jA200A 7 > totolX1 « ANTENNA BRACKET ASSY. RSB-0026 008-256-310

| A302 RFtoA - TRANSMITTER COVER 03-018- 5102 100-063-010
JA306 X ' - to
x SPACER 03-018- 5106 100-063-050
A311 IA U 7-7 STICKER ( HIGH VOLTAGE) R- 12135-D-0 390-100-010
>±:tIA J 7
A312
A 313A
'
7
TR ' V — vlfipn
>
- LABEL "CAUTION"
TX CHASSIS ASSY.
03-025-0202 100-063-071
TX CHASSIS ASSN 008-493-020
 Page M /3 -
SYMBOL NAME NAME TYPE CODE No. REMARKS

A400 TERMINAL BOARD PLATE (1 03-145-3101 100-265-310

A401 SPACER 05-003-0035 590-300-350
A402 TERMINAL BOARD PLATE ( 2 03-145-3102 100-265-320
A 403 COVER 03-144-3202 100- 264-110
A404 SPACER SQ-6 000-801-699
A405 CIRCULATOR FIXING PLATE 03-015-3203 100-090-050
A406 CICUIT FIXING ANGLE 03-011-3227 100-049-611
A407 T >y y- xm AMP. CASE COVER 03- 145-5103 100- 265-400
A408 MIC >±.#JAU MIC LABEL 03-145-5106 100-265-940
A 409 AMP. CASE 03- 145-5102 100-265-390
A 410
A411
i/ - )V K
* <-
/ SHIELD COVER
AMP./MIC FIXING PLATE
03-145-5104
03-145-5101
100-265-410
100-265-381
A412 MICff £ X ® MIC SUPPORTER 03 - 145-5105 100- 265-420
A413A T7 > 77MICffipp AMP./MIC ASSY . RSB-0026 /31-066 008-491-530
A414 MD:S ® IRf't ® MO BOARD PLATE 03-145-5002 100- 265-340
A415 FETW £ A ® FET SUPPORTER 03-145-5003 100- 265-350
A416 W& '> - F HEAT SHEET 03-144-5106 100-264-180
A417 RF '> t - v RF CHASSIS 03- 145-5001 100-265-330
A 418 LABEL 03-017-0207 100-056-580

I
i

j
J
 FURUN0 Model FR -2835SW- 30AF/36 AF
filMpBaaiS
• Unit RSB-0027/0032 Page
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST
Ref .Dwg.
SCANNER UNIT M M -
2000
SYMBOL NAME ^ ^ 6
NAME
C3470-E01- A
TYPE CODE No. REMARKS
IB# SBPHP « u-K ##
A 101 A j'yjnms , ANTENNA RADIATOR ASSY. SN30 AF 008-505- 920
ANTENNA RADIATOR ASSY. SN36AF 008- 505-910
A 103 7'sftm-m ANTENNA BRACKET 03 - 015 -3213 100-090- 540
A104 Tii'A W - '
PROTECTION CAP 03-029-0402 100-091-131
A 106 H -WiV CHOKE GUIDE 03-015 -3235 100-090-740
si Mgit
A107
A 108 o' )>r * BALL BEARING
O- RING
6809VV 000-801-590
JISB2401- 1 A - G65 000-851 -310
A109 LABEL 03-029-0202 100-091 -100
A 110 MsA7 Y MAIN SHAFT 03-015-3214 100-090-552
A 111 v- u>r SEAL RING 03-015-3215 100-090-560
A 112 -
A 113 * >r
vj
KEY
V - RING
03-015-3216
VR -130A
100-090-570
000- 850-739
'
7 )srmfe± M
A 114
* ' BEARING FIXING PLATE 03-011-3218 100- 049- 531
A115 MAGNET FIXING PLATE 03-015-3225 100-090- 650
A118 7 ' 7t >h T) AJ - '
PROTECTION CAP 03-006-3292 300-632- 920
A119 _h PB / °
AS
A 120 A tAMtto
' HEATER PACKING PLATE 03-006-3293
HEATER MOUNTING PLA103- 011 -3501
300- 632-930
100-049-940 FOR DE-ICER
HEATER SUPPORTING PL 03-006-3282 300- 632- 820 FOR DE-ICER
U-K g 5 lttiLP
A121 V 7ii> *r HEATER LEAD WIRE OUT 03-006-3283
BEARING 6014ZZ
300-632- 830
000- 873- 273
FOR DE -ICER

A122 7V -t (1) SPACER (I) 03-015-3217 100- 090- 580

A 123 GEAR BOX 03-015 - 3212 100-090-532
A 124 SCANNER TURNING GEAI 03-015 -3226 100-090-660
A 125 7V -t (2) SPACER (2) 03-015 - 3218 100-090- 590
A 126 V 7U >7 " BEARING 6014ZZ 000- 873- 273
A127 7" AA BRACKET 03-015 -3219 100-090-601
A128 fl-§- ® m (1) TIMING GEAR 03-015 -3223 100-090- 630
A 129 BEARING WASHER AW -13X 000-800-969
A130
^ rrsrmtA BEARING NUT AN-13 000-800- 968
A 131 ENCODER FIXING PLATE 03-015-3221 100- 090-611
A132 SPACER SB8M4- 10-BS 000-655-988
A 133 7" AA W - "
PROTECTION CAP 03-011-3224 100- 049- 580
A134 \iA-W - SENSOR COVER 03-006- 3219 300-632-190 FOR DE-ICER
A 135 AS SENSOR PACKING RSR - 2112 361 -821 -120
A136 PC BOARD FIXING PLATE 03-015-3222 100-090- 620
A 137 77 " 7° 7 ADAPTOR 03-012- 5402 301 -254-020
A138A WAVEGUIDE ADAPTOR 03-011-3301 100- 049 - 680
mm CONDUCTOR 03-015- 3301 100-090-760
A139 CENTERING METAL 03-011 -3225 100-049-591
A 140 SCANNER CHASSIS 03 - 016-3201 100- 091 - 163
A 141 iin - COVER 03 -011 -3101 100-049-320
 SYMBOL NAME
Page M 14S-
NAME TYPE CODE No. REMARKS
IB# BBnan£
A 142 COVER PACKING 03-011 - 3102 100- 049-330
A 144 WG @ £ £ JI WAVEGUIDE RETAINER 03-016- 3205 100- 091-200
A 145 WAVEGUIDE 03-016-3202 100-091 -170
o )>r
A 146
' O - RING ARP568-345 000- 851 - 891
A147A ttlf — swu SW COVER 03-006-3216 300-632-160
SW # A * 7 >
* SWITCH COVER PACKING 03-005 -3225
SWITCH COVER CHAIN TM-14-B-CR
300- 532-250
000- 841-376
A 148 SW MOUNTING PLATE 03 - 006- 3215 300-632- 150
A 149 SWA ° 7 +> SW PACKING 03-006 - 3213 300-632- 131
A150 MOTOR COVER 03-015-3101 100-090-454
A 151 MOTOR COVER PACKING 03-015-3102 100-090- 460
A152 T- xm EARTH BOLT 03-011-3226 100- 049 - 601
•
A 153 WGlS # ffi WAVEGUIDE FIXING PLAT 03-016-3204 100- 091-190
A 154 t ASWff £ A #2
-?
TERMINAL SW SUPPORTI RSR -2115 361-821 - 150
A155 tf-7ASWSXft 7>rA TERMINAL SW FIXING PLAT! RSR -2114 361 -821-140
A156 DRIVE GEAR RETAINER 03-015 -3228 100- 090- 680
A157 WMmM- DRIVE GEAR 03-015-3227 100-090- 671
A 158 MOTOR FIXING PLATE 03-015- 3229 100-090- 690
A159 POSITIONING BOLT 03-015 - 3231 100- 090-700
A160 i FIXING ANGLE 03-015-3211 100-090-522
A161 WG3ltt * Ah
* WAVEGUIDE FIXING BOL 03-016-3203
‘
100- 091-180
A162 LIFTING FIXTURE 03-015-3241 100- 095-230
A 163 k*> PIN 03-011 -3206 100-049 - 421
A 164 ss&mKM ® PC BOARD FIXING PLATE 03-015-3237 100-094- 360
A165 FIXTURE 03-015-3238 100-094-370
A 166 TERMINAL BOARD PLATE 03-015-3236 100-090- 751
A167 I"jy " 'A" EDGING CE-024 *1M* 000- 570-285
A168 HINGE TH- TM- 5 000- 872-005
A 169 TRIAC FIXING PLATE 03- 011-3502 100- 049- 950
A 170 RTB/MJ7-7 LABEL 03-029-0201 100-091 -090
A171 t>UlT COVER FIXING BOLT 03-011 - 3103 100-049- 340
A172 sittrw COVER FIXING BOLT 03-015-3103 100-090- 470
A 173 3 " A97 V + RUBBER WASHER 03-011 -3105 100-049-360
A 174 TEFLON WASHER 03-011 -3106 100-057 -100
A 175 Hit WASHER 03-011-3104 100-049-350
A176 k°> PIN 03-015-3232 100-090-710
A177 'OJt- hP'Ol' HELICAL INSERT COIL -1.25X1.5DNS 000-867-635
A 178 ROPE <j> 4 600mm 000-835- 320
h >r
A 179
A 180 - -
Tii'A hn
' >r
)
'
COUPLING SBP - 50K SUS 000-844- 165
BLIND PLATE 03-030-0401 100- 091 -640
A 181
' -7
A j7 ( 40) LABEL RNC -1040 390- 310- 400
A182 Is] U lb to KEY 03-015-3224 100-090- 640
A 183 SVM 'M SW POSITION PLATE 03-006- 3217 300-632 - 172
A 200 A ANTENNA BRACKET ASS' RSB-0026 008-256- 310
 MODEL FR/FAR- 2 8 3 5 SW
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST U N I T TRASCE I VER U N I T PAGE

1996 - 2 REF. DWG -

C3405 E01 - ’
M- 1 5
SYMBOL P A R T S N A M E T Y P E / D W G. N O CODE N O. R E M A R K S
A
A
201
203
COVER
AIR FILTER
03-030
--
03 030
-5103
5101-0
-5104-00
100
100
--134
134-380
-400
A
A
204
205
FILTER RETAINER
CLASP *H00K & LOCK *
03 030
-
C 1007
-2 00-S0053 0
- -
100
000
--872--857
134 410

A
A
211
212
MAIN CHASSIS
FIXING PLATE
03
03
--030-5201-4
030-5202-1
100-134-424
100-134-431
A 213 MOUNTING ANGLE (L) 03 -030030-5203-0 100-134-440
A 214 WG OUTLET ADAPTOR 03 -030-5204 -1 100-134-451
A
A
215
216
WEEP PROTECTION BLOCK
GAP ADJUSTOR
03
03
--030--5205
5206-0
-1
100-134-470
100-134-461
A 217 RF CHASSIS FIXING ANGLE 03 --030 - 5207-0 100-134-480
A 218 POSITIONING PIN 03 030-5208-1 100-134-491
A
A
219
220
PLATE
DUCT
03
03
--030 -5209-1
030-5211-2
- -
100 134 501
- -
100 134 512
A 221 SHIELD COVER 03-030-5212-1 100-134- 521
A 222 METER PANEL FIXING ANGLE 03-030-5213-0 100-134- 530
A 223 METER PANEL 03-030-5214-1 100-134-541
A 225 BOTTOM PLATE 03-030-5216-0 100-134 - 560
A 228 CABLE CLAMP FIXING PLATE 03-030- 5219-0 100-134- 590
A 229 CORNER PLATE 03-030-5221-0 - -
100 134 600

A 231 CABLE CLAMP 03-010- 5108-3 301-051-083

A 232 CLAMP PLATE 03-010- 5109-0 301-051-090
A 234 BLIND PLATE 03-023-5219-0 100-091-410
A 235 STICKER (HIGH VOLTAGE) R -12135-D -0 390-100-010
A 237 HINGE TH-TM -11 000-872-011
A 238 FILTER RETAINER 03-023-5218-0 100-091-400
A 251 BELT DAMPER E06-10426-1 100-034-631
A 252 RF SHIELD COVER 03-030- 5302-1 100-134-631
A 253 AIR SHUTTER 03-030- 5303-0 100- 134-640
A 254 RF CHASSIS FIXING PLATE 03-030- 5304- 2 100-134-652
A 255 SUPPORTING PIN 03-030-5305-0 100-134-660
A 256 CORNER PLATE 03-030-5306-0 100- 134-670
A 257 NUT 03-030-5307-0 100-134-680
A 258 CAUTION LABEL 03-030-5308-0 100-137-630
A 259 BOARD FIXING PLATE 03-130-5601 100-253-760
A 260 MAGNETRON FIXING ANGLE 03-023- 5307-0 100-091-490

A 261 MAGNETRON FIXING PLATE 03-023- 5308-0 100-091- 500

A 263 GROMMET NG -79- M 000-871- 213
A 264 GROMMET NG -79- Q 000-871-217
A
A
272
273
CIRCULATOR FIXING ANGLE
-
E CORNER FIXING PLATE
03
03
-030- 5405-0
-023 5403-0
-5402
100-134-730
100-091- 560
A
A
274
275
ADAPTOR
HY MOUNTING PLATE (2)
03
03
-012
-012
-
- -0
5404-0
301- 254-020
301- 254-040
A
A
276
277
FILTER WAVEGUIDE
FILTER
03
03
--018--5302--0
018 5301 0 100-098-160
100-098-170
A
A
278
279
MIC FIXTURE
IF AMP CASE FIXING PLATE
03
03
--023-5406-0
007-5314-0
100-091- 590
100-049-110
A 280 LABEL 03 -017-5506-0 100-070-590
A 281 IF AMP CASE COVER 03-017-5505-1 100-062-711
A 282 IF AMP CASE 03-017-5504-0 100-062-700
A 283 CONNECTOR FIXING PLATE 03-023-5501-0 100-091 -620
A 285 BOARD FIXING PLATE 03-023-5405-0 100-091-580
A 286 EARTHING PLATE 03-030-5501-1 100-137-641

A 291 TERMINAL ST- A8 000 -655

536-358
A 292 SPACER SB8M4-10- BS 000 --804-988
A
A
293
295
SPACER
SPACER *B*
HSA -4065
SB6M3 15BS-
000
000 -655 --985
065
A 298 SPACER (2) HSA -3045 000 -803-045
 11 R Kl N O MODEL F R 2 0 6 0 S/ 2 8 6 2 S/ 2 8 6 5 S W
MECHANICAL PARTS LIST U N I T RTR -0 1 8 PAGE

-
1995 11 REF. EWG - -
C 3312 E01 -
M 16
SYMBOL PARTS NAME T Y P E/D W G. N O C O D E N O. R E M A R K S
A 301 CHASSIS 03 5201-0
-023--5101 - -
100 091 240
A 302 COVER 03-023 -00 100 -091 -430
210
A
A
303
304
RF CHASSIS
MICRO WAVE CKT CHASSIS
03
03
--023--5401--0
023 5301 100
100
--091--540
091

A
A
305
306
RF CHASSIS COVER
FIXING ANGLE
03
03
--023 -5302-0
023-5303-0
100
100
--091 -440
091-450
A
A
307
308
REINFORCEMENT ANGLE
MAGNETRON FIXING PLATE
03
03
--023-5306-0
023- 5308-0
100-091-480
-- --
100 091 500
A
A
309
310
IF AMP FIXING PLATE
EARTHING PLATE
03
03
-023-5311-0
-023-5312-0
100 091 520
- -
100 091 530

A 311 MAGNETRON FIXING ANGLE 03-023-5307-0 -

100 091 -490
A 312 NUT PLATE 03-023- 5304-0 -
100 091 -460
A 313 BAND FIXING PLATE 03-023- 5309-0 -
100 091 -441
510
03-017- 5311-1
--- ---677
A 314 SCR FIXING BASE 100 062
A 315 SCR FIXING PLATE 03-017- 5312-0 100 062 450
A
A
316
317
HEAT SINK
SPACER
- - -
GE 50
SB8 M4 15 BS
000 108
000-877-111
A 318 SPACER -
HSA 4095 000-804-095
A 319 STICKER (HIGH VOLTAGE) -- - -
R 12135 D 0 390-100-010
A 320 LABEL - -
03 017 5129 0 - -
100 070 600

A 321 FAN GUARD 109-019 C 000-102-963

A 322 SPACER HSA -3015 000-803-015
A 323 HINGE 03-012- 5325 -0 301-253- 250
A 324 STOPPER 03-023- 5313-0 100-094-630
A 325 HY MOUNTING PLATE (1) - -
03 012 5403 0 - 301-254-030
A 326 HY MOUNTING PLATE (2) - -
03 012 5404 0 - 301-254-040
A
A
327
328
-
E CORNER FIXING PLATE
MIC FIXTURE
-- - -
03 023 5403 0
03 023 5406 0
-- 100-091-560
100-091-590

-- -- --
A 329 IF AMP CASE 03 017 5504 0 100-062-700
A 330 IF AMP CASE LID 03 017 5505 0 100-062-710

- - --
A
A
331
332
IF AMP CASE FIXING PLATE
AMP CASE FIXTURE
03
03
- -
007 5314 0
017 5507 0
100-049-110
100-088-860
A 333 LABEL 03- - -
017 5506 0 100-070-590
A
A
334
335
ADAPTOR
WAVEGUIDE SEAL
03
03
-- -- --
012 5402 0
005 3155 0
301-254-020
100-025-810
A
A
336
337
SHIELD CASE
HEAT SINK
03
03
-- -- --
017 5111 2
017 5113 1
100-062-162
100-062-181
A 338 PT FIXING PLATE 03 - - -
017 5112 0 100-062-170
A
A
339
340
PC BOARD FIXING PLATE
SPACER
03 -- - -
023 5216 0
HSA 3035
100-091-380
000-803-035
A 341 SPACER (2) HSA -3045 000-803-045
A 342 METER PANEL 03-023- 5208-0 100-091-310
A 343 HINGE FIXING PLATE 03-023- 5209-0 100-091-320
A
A
344
345
PROTECT PLATE
SPACER
-- - -
03 023 5211 0
HSA 4040
100-091-330
000-804-040
A 346 EDGING CE -024 *1M* 000-570- 285
A 347 LABEL (R) 03-017- 5611-0 100-062-770
A 348 HINGE TH - TM- 5 BRASS 000-872-005
A 349 EDGING CE -032 *1M* 000- 570-287
A 350 LABEL 03-030-0202-0 100-091-820

A
A
351
352
KNOB * WING TYPE *
KNOB CAP
--
023 4420 BLACK 21DIA
040 4020 BLACK
000-515 -311
000-515 -324
A
A
353
354
METER PANEL SUPPORT
CABLE CLAMP
-- --
03 023 5207 0
03 010 5108 0
-- 100-091-300
301-051-080
A 355 CLAMP PLATE - -
-
03 010 5109 0 301-051-090
A
A
356
357
MOUNTING FIXTURE
MOUNTING FIXTURE
-
03 023 5204 0
- -
03 023 5202 0
-
-- 100-091-270
100-091-250
A
A
358
359
MOUNTING FIXTURE
W.G. FLANGE
-
03 023 5203 0
-
03 012 5130 0
--
-- 100-091- 260
301-251-300
A 360 BLIND PLATE -
03 030 0401 0 -
- 100-091-640
A 361 SPRING PIN 4 X 20 SUS 000-866-185
A 362 CONNECTOR FIXING PLATE 03-017-5115-0 100-062- 200
A 363 FAN FIXING PLATE 03-023- 5217-0 100-091-390
A 364 COVER SUPPORT 03-023-5205-0 100-091-280
A 365 RF CHASSIS SUPPORT 03-023- 5206-0 100-091-290
U N I T RTR -018 REE DWG C 3312- E 01 - P A G E M - 17
SYMBOL PARTS NAME T Y P E/D W G. N O C O D E N O. R E M A R K S

--- --- ---

A 366 FILTER RETAINER 03 023 5218 0 100 091-400
-091
A
A
367
368
BLIND PLATE
STOPPER
03 023 5219
03 012 5107
0
0
100
301
--251--070
410

--251--081
A 369 SPRING PIN 4 X40 SUS 000 866 191
A 370 FOOT - - -
03 012 5108 1 301
A 371 SPONGE 03-023-5221-0 100-091-420
A 372 SPACER * B* SB6 M -15 BS
3 000-655-985
A
A
373
374
SIDE PLATE
POWER PACK CASE 03
--023--5213
03 023 0 -
5212-0
100-091-350
100-091-340
A
A
375
376
BOTTOM PLATE
TOP PLATE
-- -- --
03 023 5214 0
03 023 5215 0 --091 -370
100 091 360
100 -
A
A
377
378
SPACER (2)
CLASP *HOOK & LOCK * - -
-
HSA 3020
-
C 1007 2 OOSOO53 0
000
000 --803-020
872-857
- -- -- --091-220
A 379 AIR FILTER 03 023 5103 0 100 091-230
A 380 AIR FILTER RETAINER -
03 023 5102 0 100
A 381 NAME PLATE 03-009-0117-1 300-901-171
A 382 CONNECTOR FIXING PLATE 03-023- 5501-0 100-091-620
A 383 SPACER SB-6 M 3-10- BS 000-877-113
A 384 SPRING PIN 4X8 AU SUS304 000-801-595
A 385 NUT PLATE 03-023-5305-0 100-091-470
A 386 BOLT RRA -3004-0 340-130-040
A 387 BOBBIN FIXTURE 03-017-5313-0 100-062-460
A 388 BOBBIN 03-017- 5315-0 100-062-480
A 389 LIMITER FIXTURE 03-023-5402-0 100-091-550
F II R U N O MODEL FR/FAR — 2 8 0 5 S E R.
PAGE
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST U N I T D I S P L A Y U N I T

I S PD i
1996- 5 REF. DWG C 3404- K 01 - BLOCK NO. E-1
SYMBOL T Y P E SPECIFICATIONS CODE NO. REMARKS
K Car.
m £ m 3
- K#
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 7°'Jz/ FTM":/

03 P9132 HIC 8 008-448- 520

03 P9135 HIC 11 008-448- 530
03 P 9134 HI CIO 008-448- 550
03 P9133 HIC9 008-448-560
1 B 04 A 0004 PCT-9106 AC PROTECT RDP - 106 008-447-800
1 B 05 A 0005 03 P9111 C FOR JAPANESE 008-460-440
03 P9111 D FOR ENGLISH -
008 460-450
1 B 06 A 0006 MB-9169 008-460-320
1 B07 A 0007 INT-9170 008-460-310
1 B08 A 0008 VDA -9114 VIDEO AMP RDP -106 008-447-690
1 B09 A 0009 HV 9017 A, HV 10 KW X - BAND 008-419- 540
HV -9017 B TX - HV 25 KW X - BAND 008-417-710
HV -9017 E, HV 30 KW S - BAND 008-420-900
1 B 10 A 0010 PAL -9171 / TUN 9128 C / D 008-460- 280
1 B 11 A 0011 PAR -9172 / TUN 9128 A 008-460- 290
1 B 12 A 0012 -
PWS 9173 008-460-250
1 B 22 A 0022 18 P9002 A FAR - 2805 008-460-410
1 B 23 A 0023 03 P9164 r ECHO 008-460-460
1 B 25 A 0025 64 P 1106 A,GYR 0 CONV. GC -7 / 8 / 10 004-412- 220
14 P 0261 B RP 008-467-610
14 P 0262 * CARD I / F 008-451 - 190
18 P 9002 A, ARPA 008-460-041

CRT ASSEMBLY CRT

1 B 14 A0001 CDT- 2901B- 1 A 000- 136- 185 Until JAN . ' 98
CRT- 2901B- 1 A 000- 137- 764
ASSEMBLY
1 B 03 A * 0003 RDP-115-60 - PTU 9187 A / POWER 008 -460-340
RDP-115-72 rPTU 9187 B POWER 008-460-350

MOTOR t -3-

B 1 MMS -08 C 24 DH - R 000- 128-410

B 2 MMS -06 C 24 DS - R 01 03 S 9110-0 000- 128-409

CAPACITOR
C 1 ECQ - E 2 A 474 MW 000- 104- 841

FUSE tl X"-
F 1 FGBO 5 A AC 250 V 000- 549-022 220 VAC
FGBO 10 A AC 125 V 000- 549-065 100 / 110 VAC
F 2 FGBO 5 A AC 250 V 000- 549-022 220 VAC
FGBO 10 A AC 12 5 V 000- 549 -065 100 / 110 VAC
F 3 FGBO 0.5 A AC 12 5 V 000- 549 -060 TX -HV
F 4 FGBO - A 5 A AC 125 V 00 S 0093 -0 000- 549 -064 SCAN . MOTOR
UNIT D I S P L A Y U N I T R E F. DWG. C 3 4 0 4 - K 0 1 - BLOCK NO. E-1 «. 2
SYMBOL T Y P E SPECIFICATIONS CODE NO. REMARKS
IB m £ m ft ^ — K #
^ n
FILTER 7 •f II 9 -

FL 1 LF-2 1 0 AC / DC 2 5 0 V 1 0 A 0 0 0- 5 8 8- 4 1 0

TRACKBALL

TB 1 EUA- FTF8 1 4 B 0 3S 7 6 7 8 - 0 0 0 0 -1 1 5 - 5 3 3

END
FURUNO Model FR/FAR-2805 SER.
Unit DISPLAY UNIT
JHTFPB
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref . Dwg. C3404-K15- Page
98# 12 J3 Blk. No. E-2
SYIBOL TYPE CODE No. REMARKS SHIPPABLE
ASSQBLY
M
PRINTH) CIRCUIT BOARD
PB6-972-974-915 (CDT2901B-1A ) 000-137-758 IBCRTffl, o
For CRT used lately
PBG-973, VIDEO (CDT2901B-1A ) 000-137-759 IBCRTffi, o
For CRT used lately
PBG-975, POWER (CDT2901B-1A ) 000-137-760 IBCRTffi, o
For CRT used lately
29CF CRT (S) ASS 000-790-226 added in 1/99 iHiO o
(CDMC29CF301 ) IM,
'

For CRT used currently

CDUC-29CF301 PS (S) 000-790-227 added in 1/99 liiflll o
(CDIIC29CF301 ) SzftCRTffl,
For CRT used currently
CDUC-29CF301 MAIN (S) 000-790-229 added in 1/99 ilibfl o
(CDMC29CF301 ) SaftCRTffl ,
For CRT used currently

COIL
PCL62-09 000-137-761

TRANSISTOR
HPA72R 000-137-762

TRANSPOHEl
PCF72-01 (CDT2901B-1A ) 000-137-763 .
IBCRTffl For CRT used lately
FBT-2436469 (FB) 000-790-228 added in 1 /99 iiiiQ o
(CDMC29CF301 ) JUiilECRTffl, Currently used.
 FURUNO Model FR-2115 /2125
Un i t RSB-0074/0075
SCANNER UNIT
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref . Dwg. C3466-K02-B Page
98
^ .
Blk No. E-3
SYMBOL TYPE CODE No. REMARKS SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY
m# mmLm&
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
2B2 03P9243A , RFC 008-487-260 FR-2115 o
03P9243B, RFC 008-487-280 FR-2125 O
2B3 03P9244 A, MD 008-487-300 FR-2115 O
03P9244B, MD 008-487-320 FR-2125 o
2B4 03P9232, IF 008-487-240 o
2B6 03P9242, TB 008-487-230 o
2B7 MP-3795 008-312-370 o
SCANNER CHASSIS
RSB-0074 008-488-010 24 rpm, w/o RF module o
RSB-0075 008-488-030 42 rpm, w/o RF module O

RF MODULE RFEy
^ - JL
RTR-062
RTR-063A
008-487-160
008-490-680
Except Japan
Japan only
04s £ |
^< O
O
RTR-063 008-487-170 O

MIC AEEMBLY MI C §pDn

U801 RU-9253 *
008-487-350 RTR-063 o
RU— 9371 008-487-340 RTR-062 O

B801
M0T0R
D8G-516 *000- 9631--715
- 24 rpm, w/capacitor
D8G-571 000-136-566 42 rpm, w/capacitor
B80 Z 109P0824H602 000-140-764 25kW, w/cable O

SWITCH 7, 4 "j 4-
S901 RS-1 NO 000-478-301

CR870
DIODE
HVR-1 X-40B
94
*- K
000-121-156 FR-2115
MD-12N1 000-133-735 FR- 2125
CR 871 HVR-1 X-40B 000-121-156

CR 880
DIODE LIMITER
RU-9099
94
* - K 'J * -
000-126-369
$

CIRCULATOR V- . -9
HY 801 RC-3686 *
- -
3 \S

000 106 850

 Page E-4
SYMBOL TYPE CODE No. REMARKS SHIPPABLE
^8
ASSEMBLY
=H »
«*
mm
RESISTOR IBM .
R899 ERF-10HMJ102 000-123-395

TRANSFORMER h7 >
T801 RT-9025
^
000-123-823 FR - 2115
RT-9023 000-123-394 FR-2125

MAGNETRON FP>
V801 MG5241 000-100-036 FR— 2115 Except Japan
E3566 000-141-073 FR — 2115 Japan only
MG5436 000-140-762 FR — 2125

CABLE ASSEMBY
W1 03-1903 ( 2-R 2P) 008-486-910
W2 03-1904 ( 13-13P ) 008- 486-920
 FURUNO Model FR-2125W
Unit RSB-0076/77/78
SCANNER UNIT
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref . Dwg. C3333-K01- Page
1B Blk. No.
SYIBOL
99
TYPE
^ CODE No. REMARKS
E- f
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

2B3 MP-8161 , MP 008-391-430
2B4 BP-8162, BP 008-391-450
2B5 MPT-8226, MPT 008-391-420
2B6 03P9263, DE- ICER 008-500-090 OPTION

MOTOR
^ - 2-
B801 RM-8123 000-117-822 200/ 220VAC, 3 <f> :RSB-0076
RM-8124 000-117-823 380/ 440VAC, 3 :RSB-0077
RM-8247 000-117-824 100VAC, 1 4> :RS8-0078

SNITCH
S801 RS-1 NO 000-478-301
S802 ATK21-W 000-478-301
S3001 TR-8B50PDS2 000-478-160

DIODE 24 - K
CR3001 BCR-16C10RS *
000-141-122

RESISTOR
R3004 ERD-25PJ221 000-330-341
 M O D E L F R /F A R - 2 8 2 5 W
PAGE
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST U N I T TRANSCEI-
V E R U N I T
RTR 0 4 6
1 M nB nn
1996 - 3 REF. DWG. C 3405 - K 01- B BLOCK NO. E-10
SYMBOL T Y P E SPECIFICATIONS CODE NO. REMARKS
35 m £ m 3 — K# m
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 7°

1 B 03 A 0003 RF RTR -046 008-465 -420

1 B 05 A 0005 03 P 9189 rI NT RTR -046 / 047 008-470-800
1 B 06 A 0006 R FC -9008 D r RFC RTR -046 008-470-820
1 B 07 A 0007 MD -9009 rMD RTR -029 / 046 008-470-840
1 B 08 A 0008 PTU -9185 A,PTU RTR -046 / 047 008-465 - 450 AC 100 / 115 V
PTU -9185 BrPTU RTR -046 / 047 008-465-480 AC 220 / 230 V
1 B 09 A 0009 IF -9007 / IF FR / FAR - 2825 W 008-465 -490
1 B 10 A 0010 MIC -6550 rMIC RTR -046 008-465 -470

MOTOR 1 2 --
B 801 MMS -08 C 24 DH - R 000- 128-410
CAPACITOR

C 890 ECQ - V 1 H 104 J LW 000- 129- 101

DIODE SU' Ct - l' "

CR 871 MD - 12 N 1 000- 133-735

CR 880 RU -9290 03 S 9290-0 000-136-735

FUSE 12-7"

F 801 FGBO 0.5 A AC 12 5 V 000- 549 -060

F 802 FGBO - A 2 A,AC 125 V 000-549 -062

FILTER 7013-

FL 801 LF - 205 A 13- 3- 5363 000- 588-411

HIGH VOLTAGE PACK 3 +>7 ") l\° ") 9

HY 801 RC - 3686 13- 3- 3686- 2 000- 106-850

JACK
J 810 WF 3003 E 13- 3- 5387 000- 518-022

TRANSISTOR Z2 -
Q 808 2 SB 1259 000- 116- 180

RESISTOR fill)
R 889 ER F - 10 HMJ 102 000- 123-395

TRANSFORMER
T 801 RT-9023 03 S 9023-0 000-123-394
U N I T T R A N S C E I VER U N I T REF. DWG. C 3 4 0 5 - K 0 1 - B BLOCK NO. E-11
SYMBOL T Y P E SPECIFICATIONS CODE NO. REMARKS
IE -'S
ta '
m £ & 3 - K #^
TRANSFORMER

T 801 R T -9 0 2 3 0 3S 9 0 2 3 - 0 0 0 0 - 1 2 3- 3 9 4

TERMINAL BOARD

TB 8 0 1 S T K -A8 0 0 0 -1 3 5 - 5 0 9

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT

U 801 S - R X 2 4 / 0 3S 6 7 5 6 0 0 0 -1 0 6 - 8 5 6

ELECTRON TUBE 7 " DvtiZl

V 801 M5187 ( F ) 0 0 0 - 1 0 1- 7 6 0

END
 M O D E L F R - 2 1 5 0 W/ 2 8 5 2 X/ 2 8 5 5 W

TR U N I T R T R-0 1 0 PAGE
ELECTRICAL PARTS L I S T U N I T
MS pn J
1 9 9 5 -1 1 REF. DWG. C 3 3 0 0 - 0 0 5 - BLOCK NO. 2B E-12
SYMBOL T Y P E SPECIFICATIONS CODE NO. REMARKS
§E m £ m 8 a - K ##
* n
2 B0 3 0 3P-6 6 6 6 B R T B FR-2 0 5 0 X / 2 1 5 0 W -
0 0 8- 2 5 6 2 2 0
2 B0 4 0 3P6 6 6 8 P F N 1 - 0 0 8- 2 5 6 -1 4 0
2 B0 5 0 3 P-6 6 6 9 P F N - 2 FR -2 0 5 0 X / 2 1 5 0W 0 0 8- 2 5 6 - 2 3 0
2 B0 6 -
0 3 P 6 8 2 7 MAG -
FR 2 0 5 0 X / 2 1 5 0W 0 0 8- 2 5 6 - 2 4 0
2 B0 7 0 3 P-6 6 6 7 P W R FR -2 0 5 0 X / 2 1 5 0W -
0 0 8- 2 5 6 2 1 0
2 B0 8 -
0 3 P 6 6 8 0 H V -1 FR -2 0 5 0 X / 2 1 5 0W 0 0 8 - 2 5 6 -1 8 0 W / 0 3 P 6 8 1 0
-
0 3P 6 8 1 0 HV 2 - FR -2 0 5 0 X / 2 1 5 0W 0 0 8 - 2 5 6 -1 9 0
2 B0 9 CM - 5 1 4 6 D R T R - 0 1 0 0 0 8 - 2 5 6 -1 6 0
2 B1 0 I F -6 7 3 4 E R T R - 0 1 9- 3 -
008 457 150 -
TX MODULE R T R -0 1 0 0 0 8- 2 3 4 - 2 4 0 T X M O D U L E

MOTOR t -a -
2 B 0 1B0 8 0 1 1 0 9S0 0 5 0 0 0 - 4 3 0- 4 5 4
2 B 0 1B0 8 0 2 1 0 9S0 0 5 0 0 0 - 4 3 0- 4 5 4

CAPACITOR

2 B0 2 C 0 8 0 1 E C K- D 3D 2 2 2 K B N 2 2 0 0 PF 2 KV 0 0 0- 2 5 7 -3 0 8
2 B0 2 C 0 8 0 4 MD -1- 2 E -1 0 4 M 0 . 1 U F 2 5 0 WV 0 0 0- 2 6 2-0 0 1

2 B0 2 C 0 8 5 1 DD 1 0 4 - 6 9 B 1 0 2 K 5 0 V 1000PF 50V 0 0 0 - 2 5 3-8 0 6

2 B0 2 C 0 8 5 2 D D1 0 6 F1 0 3Z 5 0 N 5 . 0 0 . 0 1UF 5 0 V 0 0 0- 2 5 3- 4 4 3

DIODE a" T *- h"

2 B0 2 C R 0 8 0 3 V1 9 E 0 0 0 -1 3 6 - 0 2 0
2 B0 2 C R 0 8 0 4 V1 9 E 0 0 0 -1 3 6 - 0 2 0
2 B0 2 C R 0 8 0 5 V1 9 E 0 0 0 -1 3 6 - 0 2 0
2 B0 2 C R 0 8 0 8 E D -1 6 H 1 1 3- 3 - 2 6 4 3 - 0 0 0 0 -1 3 2 - 5 5 0
2 B0 2 CR 0 8 0 9 E D -1 6 H 1 -
1 3- 3 2 6 4 3 0 - 0 0 0 -1 3 2 - 5 5 0
2 B0 2 CR 0 8 1 0 E3902 -
0 0 0 1 0 5-6 2 0
BS4122 0 0 0 -1 0 8-8 8 9

2 B 0 2 C R 0 8 1 3 S H1 6 J 1 2 U 0 0 0 - 1 3 5 -1 6 5
2 B 0 2 C R 0 8 1 4 S H1 6 J 1 2 U 0 0 0 - 1 3 5 -1 6 5
2 B 0 2 C R 0 8 1 5 S H1 6 J 1 2 U 0 0 0 -1 3 5 -1 6 5

2 B 0 2 C R 0 8 5 1 R D -6 . 2 E B ZENER 0 0 0 -1 3 4 - 7 9 3

LAMP 7
^ 7°
2 B0 1D S 0 8 0 1 B N -5 6 6 8 A C 1 0 0 V 7t RED 0 0 0 - 5 4 1- 7 1 1

FUSE 1 1- 7 "

2 B0 1 F 0 8 0 1 FGBO-A 5 A AC1 2 5V OOSOO9 3 0 - 0 0 0- 5 4 9- 0 6 4

2 B0 1 F 0 8 0 2 F G B O- A 2 A, A C 1 2 5 V 0 0 0-5 4 9 - 0 6 2
2 B0 1 F 0 8 0 3 F G B O- A 2 A / AC1 2 5 V 0 0 0- 5 4 9 - 0 6 2
 T
U N I T TR U N I T R T R-0 1 0 REF. DWG. C 3300-005- BLOCK NO. 2 B £-13
SYMBOL T Y P E SPECIFICATIONS CODE NO. REMARKS
is C3
m £ & 3 - K ## n
FILTER -
7 0 13 -

2 B 01 FL 0801 LF - 205 A 13 - 3- 5363 000- 588-411

HOUR METER 70- jl - 3-

2 B 01 HM 0801 HM - 5 - 106 HOUR METER 000-440-923

HIGH VOLTAGE PACK 307"Jl\° "J 9

2 B 02 HY 0801 RTR -010 FR 2050 X 008- 234- 190 FCX 548

RELAY ') b-
2 B 02 K 0801 VF -12 HN 000- 108-676
2 B 02 K 0802 VF -12 HN 000- 108-676
2 B 02 K 0803 VF - 12 HN 000- 108-676

COIL -
D ril

2 B 02 L 0801 RL -6772- 1 03 S6772- 1 000- 108-655

2 B 02 L 0851 SP 0406- 5 R 6 K -6 000-429-391

METER >1 - 3-

2 B 01 M 0801 SH 48 # 3075 RP 1892-3 000-631 -892

RESISTOR T -f30
2 B 02 R 0801 FGO 20 W,200 000- 108-670
2 B 02 R 0802 ERG - 2 ANJ 6 R 8 2 W,6.8 000- 113-843

2 B 01 R 0811 FGOS 10 W,4 000- 360-035

2 B 01 R 0812 FGOS 10 W,2 000-360-036

2 B 02 R 0826 GS-1 J 4.7 M 000- 108-671

2 B 02 R 0827 GS-1 J 4.7 M 000- 108-671
2 B 02 R 0828 GS -1 J 4.7 M 000- 108-671

SWITCH

2 B 01 S 0801 22 AC - J 5 000-473-400
2 B 02 S 0802 22 AC - J 5 000- 473-400

TRANSFORMER

2 B 02 T 0801 RT-6664 03 S 6664-0 000- 108-658

2 B 01 T 0804 RT-6670- 1 03 S 6670 - 1 000- 108-661

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT blOKthl0

2 B 02 U 0801 MIC ASSY RTR -010 - 1 008- 234- 200 RU - 5469 W /

MIC - 5746
MIC A S S Y RTR -010- 2 008- 234- 210 S - R X 2 4 W /
MIC -6550
 T
U N I T TR U N I T R T R-0 1 0 REF. DWG. C 3300-005- BLOCK NO. 2 B £^14
SYMBOL T Y P E SPECIFICATIONS CODE NO. REMARKS
IH m £ m & 3 — K#
^ m %
ELECTRON TUBE

2 B 02 V 0801 M 4505 E 13-3-18201 000- 106-012

END
 FURUN0 Model FR-2835S
Unit RSB-0026 /0031/0088/0089 /0090
ir [7 n
SCANNER UNIT
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref.Dwg. C 3469-K01-B Page
2001 #
SYMBOL TYPE
Blk.No.
CODE No. REMARKS
E 15 -
SHIPPABLE
ASSEMBLY

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 7J>

1B2 03P9243D, RFC
'
008-488-220 X
1B3 03P9244C, MD 008-488-230 X
1B4 03P9232A, IF 008-488- 240 X
1B6 03P9242, TB 008-487-230
1B7 MP-7302 008- 256-330 X
1B8 MSS-7497 008-243-530 200/220VAC X
MSS- 7497A 008-243-540 380/440VAC X

ASSEMBLY Mnp
RSB-0026/31-066 008-491-530 AMP/MIC X
U801 RSB-0026/31-066 008-491-580 MIC RU-9427 X
RSB-0026/ 31-066 008-493-020 TR CHASSIS , RFC , MD X

SCANNER CHASSIS
RSB-0026-066- N 008-493-470 X
RSB-0026-066-I 008-493-480 X
RSB-0026-066-N-HK 008-493-490 X
RSB-0026-066-I-HK 008-493-500 X
RSB-0031-066-N 008-493-510 X
RSB-0031-066- 1 008-493-520 X
RSB-0031-066-N HK - 008-493-530 X
RSB-0031-066-l-HK 008-493-540 X
RSB-0088-066-N 008-525-300
RSB-0088-066-I 008-525-400
RSB-0089-066-N 008-525-050
RSB-0089-066-I 008-525-060
RSB-0090-066-N 008-525-070
RSB-0090-066-I 008-525-080

MOTOR
B801 RM-7398 000- 113-840 200/ 220VAC , 50/60HZ
RM-7435 000-114-399 440/ 380VAC , 50/60Hz
B802 109E1224M102 000-109-412
RM-9519 000-144-850 220VAC , 50Hz
RM- 9520 000-144-851 220VAC, 60Hz
RM-9521 000-144-852 440VAC , 60Hz

CAPACITOR
C890 ECQ - V1H104JL3 000-129-260

TRANSISTOR F7
"

Q15 2SB946P 000-133-053

 Page E- i C
SYMBOL TYPE CODE No. REMARKS SHIPPABLE
'
ASSEMBLY
fit #
DIODE K
CR870 MD-12N1 000-133-735
CR871 HVR-1 X-40B 000-121-156
CR880 RU-9426 000-141-060 DIODE LIMITTER
CR3001 BCR-16C1 OR 000-132-186 DEICER

k- -
HR3001
HEATER
ND0-50040, 60W *
000-633-409 DEICER
HR3002 ND0-50040, 60W 000-633-409 DEICER

RES ISTOR
R899 IK/10 000-123-823
R 3004 ERD-25PJ221 000-330-341 DEICER

SWITCH
^ -f " ^-j

S801 RS01, NO 000-478 301

S802 ATK 21-W 000-479-243
S3001 TR-8B50-PDS2 000-478-160 DEICER

TRANSFORMER h7 >
^
T801 RT-9273 000-136-734 PULSE TRANS.

CIRCULATOR
HY 801 RC-6584 S 000-126-345

-7
V801
MAGNETRON
MG5223F
7
* hP >
000-109-081

ROTARY ENCODER n-w -m-r

U802 RE20F-120-100-B 000-113-271

w /CONNECTOR ASSY. =1 * / 5 Ifipn

03-1967 (P2P) 008-491-450
03-1965 ( 3P) 008-491 -420
03-1969 ( 6P) 008-491-470
03-4966 ( 13-13P ) 008-491-430
03-1969 ( 6P) 008-491-470
 M O D E L F R 2 1 6 0 S W/ 2 8 3 5 S W/6 5 S W
U N I T PAGE
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST U N I T SCANNER
18 xC BB PP
SYMBOL
^ T Y
1996- 3
P E
REF. DWG. C 3312-014-
SPECIFICATIONS
BLOCK NO.
CODE NO.
1B E-17
REMARKS
ta =
-r j
*5 m £ & to n
1 B 02 MP -7302 008- 256-330
1 B 03 MSS -7497 FOR 200 / 220 V 008- 243- 530 220 / 200 V
MSS -7497.A FOR 380 / 440 V 008- 243- 540 440 / 380 V

MOTOR t 3--
1 B 01 B 0801 RM -7398 03 S 7398 000- 113-840 220 VAC
RM -7435 03 S 7435 000- 114-399 440 VAC

DIODE

1 B 15 CR 3001 BCR - 16 C 10 R 000- 132- 186 DEICER

HEATER t 3--
1 B 15 HR 3001 ND 0- 50040 r 60 W 13 — 3 — 3409 000-633-409 DEICER
1 B 15 HR 3002 ND 0- 50040,60 W 13-3-3409 000-633-409 DEICER

RESISTOR TYD ) 1

1 B 15 R 3004 ERD - 25 PJ 221 0.25 W 220 000- 330-341 DEICER

SWITCH MV9
1 B 01 S 0801 RS - lsNO 13-3- 2799 000-478-301
1 B 01 S 0802 ATK 21 - W 000-479- 243

1 B 15 S 3001 TR -8 B 50- PD S 2 13-3-4962 000-478- 160 DEICER

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT

1 B 01 U 0801 ENCODER ASSY R SB -0026 008- 256 -320 RE 20 F - 120-

100- B

END
 M O D E L F R /F A R - 2 8 3 5 S W
T R A N S C E I V E R U N I T PAGE
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST U N I T
SIS ® SB R T R - 0 4 7
I nE J
^ no
1996 - 3 REF. DWG. C 3408- K 01- A BLOCK NO. E-18
SYMBOL T Y P E SPECIFICATIONS CODE NO. REMARKS
12 =
T J
^5 m £ m & n - K#
^
PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 7° +
1 B 03 A 0003 03 P9189,INT RTR -046 / 047 008-470-080
1 B 04 A 0004 R FC -9008 E r R F C RTR -046 008-470-830
1 B 05 A 0005 MD -9009 A / MD RTR -047 008-470-850
1 B 06 A 0006 PTU -9185 A r PTU RTR -046 / 047 008-465 -450 AC 100 / 115 /

1 B 07 A 0007
PTU -9185 B / PTU
IF -9007
- RTR -046 / 047
RTR -047 008-465-780
220 / 230 V

1 B 09 A 0009 MIC / ATT -7362 RTR -047 008-465 - 730 B 8

MOTOR t - 51 -

B 801 MMS -06 C 12 DS - R 02 03 S 9109 -0 000- 128-408

CAPACITOR
C 890 ECQ - V 1 H 104 JLW 000- 129- 101

DIODE

CR 870 MD -12 N 1 000- 133-735

CR 871 MD - 12 N 1 000-133 - 735

FUSE bl -7"

F 801 FGBO 0.5 A AC 125 V 000-549 -060

F 802 FGBO - A 2 A r AC 12 5 V 000- 549 -062

FILTER 7 Tll< 5» -

FL 801 LF - 205 A 13-3- 5363 000- 588-411

HIGH VOLTAGE PACK 2

HY 801 RC -4910 S 13 - 3-4910- 2 000- 126 - 346

JACK

J 810 WF 3003 E 13-3- 5387 000- 518 -022

TRANSISTOR
Q 808 2 SB 1259 000- 116 - 180

RESISTOR T <07

R 889 ER F - 10 HMJ 102 000- 123 - 395

TRANSFORMER
T 801 RT -9273-0 03 S 9273-0 000- 136 -734
U N I T T R A N S C E I V E R UNIT REF. DWG. C 3 4 0 8 - K 0 1 - A BLOCK NO. E*19
SYMBOL T Y P E SPECIFICATIONS CODE NO. REMARKS
IB =
t t
>5 m £ ts 3 — K# ^
2 m n
TRANSFORMER F 5D7

T 801 R T - 9 2 7 3- 0 0 3 S 9 2 7 3- 0 0 0 0 -1 3 6 - 7 3 4

TERMINAL BOARD 1 ~JVWSS 'J

TB 8 0 1 S T K-A8 -
0 0 0 -1 3 5 5 0 9

ELECTRON TUBE

V 801 MG 5 2 2 3 F S - BAND 0 0 0 -1 0 9 - 0 8 1

END
 M O D E L F R - 2 1 6 0 S W/ 2 8 6 5 S W

R T R-0 1 8 PAGE
U N I T TR
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST U N I T

I SE no i
^ 1996 - 3 REF. DWG. C 3409- K 01 - BLOCK NO. 2 B 00 -
E 20
SYMBOL T Y P E SPECIFICATIONS CODE NO. REMARKS
IE m £ m 3 - K#
^ m n
2 B 02 RTR -018 FR - 2060 S / 62 S 008 -173-840 INCL.IF
AMP ETC.
2 B 03 03 P 6666 A FR - 2060 S / 2160 SW 008 - 173-870
2 B 04 03 P 6668 PFN - 1 008 - 256 - 140
2 B 05 03 P 6669 A PFN - 2 FR - 2060 S / 2160 SW 008- 256- 150
2 B 06 03 P 6827.A -
FR 2060 S / 2160 SW 008 - 256- 110
2 B 07 03 P 6667 FR - 2060 S / 2160SW 008- 173-880
2 B 08 03 P 6680 / 03 P 6810 RTR - 018 008- 173-850
03 P 6680 FR - 2060 S / 2160 SW 008- 256- 280
03 P 6810 FR - 2060 S / 2160 SW 008- 256- 270
2 B 09 CM -5146 DRTR -010 008- 256-160
2 B 10 IF -6734 D RTR -018 / 025-3 008-457- 180

CM -5146 C / TRT -7363 RTR -018 008- 173-860 W / B 9( CM )

& B 14 CTRT)

MOTOR E 3 --
2 B 01 B 0801 109 S 005 000-430-454
2 B 02 B 0802 109 S 005 000-430-454

CAPACITOR

2 B 02 C 0801 ECK - D 3 D 222 KBN 2200 PF 2 KV 000- 257-308

2 B 02 C 0804 MD -1 - 2 E - 104 M 0.1 UF 250 WV 000- 262-001

DIODE 3"

2 B 01 CR 0061 TLR 143 K 000-100- 146

2 B 01 CR 0062 TLR 143 K 000-100- 146

2 B 02 CR 0803 V 19 E 000-136 -020

2 B 02 CR 0804 V 19 E 000-136 -020
2 B 02 CR 0805 V 19 E 000- 136 -020
2 B 02 CR 0808 ED -16 H 1 13-3- 2643-0 000- 132- 550
2 B 02 CR 0809 ED - 16 H 1 13-3- 2643-0 000-132- 550
2 B 02 CR 0810 BS 894 S - BAND 000- 105- 100 TR TUBE

2 B 02 CR 0813 SH 16 J 12 U 000- 135 - 165

2 B 02 CR 0814 SH 16 J 12 U 000- 135 - 165
2 B 02 CR 0815 SH 16 J 12 U 000- 135 - 165

FUSE tl-*"

2 B 01 F 0801 FGBO - A 5 A AC 125 V 00 S 0093 -0 000- 549-064

2 B 01 F 0802 FGBO - A 2 A / AC 125 V 000- 549-062
2 B 01 F 0803 FGBO - A 2 A / AC 125 V 000- 549-062

FILTER 7TJl*3-
2 B 01 FL 0801 LF - 205 A 13 - 3- 5363 000- 588-411
UNIT TR UNIT R T R-0 1 8 REF. DWG. C 3409- K 01- BLOCK NO. 2 B O O
SYMBOL T Y P E SPECIFICATIONS CODE NO. REMARKS
E t=»
m £ m is 3 - K#
^ n
HOUR METER 7 1- 1- 3-

2 B 01 HM 0801 HM - 5- 106 HOUR METER 000-440-923

HIGH VOLTAGE PACK 3 <>7 nJl\ onJ 9

2 B 02 HY 0801 RC -4910 13- 3-4910-1 000- 106-862

RELAY ') b -
2 B 02 K 0801 VF -12 HN 000- 108-676
2 B 02 K 0802 VF -12 HN 000-108-676
2 B 02 K 0803 VF -12 HN 000-108-676

COIL

2 B 02 L 0801 RL -6772- 1 03 S 6772- 1 000- 108-655

METER 1- 3-

2 B 01 M 0801 SH 48 # 3075 RP 1892-3 000-631 -892

RESISTOR

2 B 02 R 0801 FGO 10 W IK 000- 357-360

2 B 02 R 0802 ERG - 2 ANJ 6 R 8 2 W,6.8 000- 113-843

2 B 01 R 0811 FGOS 10 W,4 000-360-035

2 B 01 R 0812 FGOS 10 W,2 000-360-036

2 B 02 R 0826 GS - 1 J 4.7 M 000-108-671

2 B 02 R 0827 GS -1 J 4.7 M 000-108-671
2 B 02 R 0828 GS -1 J 4.7 M 000-108-671

SWITCH
2 B 01 S 0801 22 AC - J 5 000-473-400
2 B 01 S 0802 22 AC - J 5 000-473-400

TRANSFORMER

2 B 02 T 0801 RT-6991 03 S 6991 - 1 000- 113- 272

2 B 02 T 0804 RT-6670-1 03 S 6670- 1 000-108-661

INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
2 B 02 U 0801 MIC A S S Y RTR -018 008- 256-120 W / B 13( ATT )

ELECTRON TUBE f" yutiv

2 B 02 V 0801 MG 5240 S- B A N D 000- 100- 240

END
 1 2 3 4 5 6

B B

C C

D D

o
 D- 2
1 2 3 4

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F

SCkSMfi
 1 2 3 4
D - 3

RADIATOR ASSY.
FR -2115/2125/2125V : XN - 20AF , XN24AF
FR - 1505/1510/1525 MK - 3: XN-12AF , XN-20AF
A FR - 1710: XN- 12 AF, XN-20AF \ A
FR - 1725; XN- 20AF, XN-24AF \

RADIATOR ASSY .
XN=T2 A £ ( 008 -485 -250)
XN-20AF ( 008 -485 - 260)
XN-24AF (008-485-270)

B
RF ^EVZL ;u ROTARY JOINT T 'y’r -f B
RF MODULE ANTENNA FIXING BASE ASSY.
RSB- 0074/0075
FR-2115 RTR - 062/062A (008-487-190)
FR -2125/2125 V RTR -063
FR - 1505 MK - 3 RTR - 067 1
FR -1510 MK -3 RTR -062/062 A
FR -1525 MK - 3 RTR - 063
FR - 1710 * RTR -062/062A
FR -1725 RTR -063
RTR - 062A: Japan only ( B
RTR - 062: Except Japan ( B <)
C
* SCANNER COVER
03-001 - 3261 C
(300-132-613)

vy A
^
V -RING
i
VR -120A r

(000-850-738) \
:

y -VMvmmz.
\
REED SWITCH MOUNT
RSK -2108
( 361 - 121-081)
1

D !D
DRIVE GEAR
03 -001-3232 BEARING !
( 300 -132- 334) M3 x 15 6013ZZ (000-802 -338)
M3 x 8
KEY
MOTOR FIXING PLATE 7X 7 X 23 (000- 866 -851)
!
03 - 001 -3231 MAGNET
300 - 132- 317 RP -1757 MS4 X 9 X 15 (000- 499 -055)
v %'y flSSfeV t SCANNER TURING GEAR
COVER GASKET 03 - 001- 3243 (300-132 - 412)
03 -001 - 3263 TURNING GEAR FLANGE
( 300-132- 631) RSI - 2002 ( 360- 920-021)

E
E
7,7 V-p
SLIDE RAIL
M5 x 10
RSK - 2401
( 361 -124-011
*CABLEfJ CLAMPING
5

FLANGE SCANNER SOUSING

RFE/ a-A'
03 - 001- 3213
(300-132- 131)
03-001- 3212
300-132-123 * RF MODULE
RTR -062 ( 008 -487 - 160)
=*r -y ~r — 7J YVJV 1' -
RTR -062 A (008 490 -680)
*SCANNER COVER \ PACKING RTR -063 ( 008 -487-170)
-
03 001 - 3261 JISF8801 25C RTR - 067 ( 008 - 490 - 580)
F 300- 132 -613 ( 000-804 - 901) F
;

!
n yti
CHAIN
— f- i
— >
ST- 16
000- 841 -394
APPROVED ~ TITLE
!
f/\ fcA f
; FR - 2115/2125
FR -2125 V CHECKED RSB-0074/0075 ANTENNA UNIT
yAMhAlu <
FR -1505/1510/1525 MK -3
X n - J1' 7/
; FR -1710/1725 DRAWN
£. Ml font
DWG. NO .
C3464-E04-D
50x 50x 50x80 x 80
 1 2 3 4
D - 4
;

i
i

A !
A
i A101 ( XN-12 AF . XN-20AF^ /cliXN-24AF)
-

M4x15

B I
B

!
L

-
Dt ICER HEATER
NDO 10013 - A -155
M3 6
*
A - 127
A - 128
A - 121
M4 X 12
A - 122 v
M4 x 12 ^

9G - 101
M 4 X 12 /
M4 X12
A - 123
A - 124

M8 x 20
M 4 X 12 D

BT - 101

M6 X 18 A '111
A - 114
NAME PLATE
i

E
i

^&- M 4 Xl 6

-BSCANNER MOTOR
801
-
BP 0162
CARD
F

-
\ F £B 8 • f f TITLE
> - M5 x 8
M4 x 8 APPROVED
.
lS faptZlLM I
l

CHECKED
RSB-0076/77/78
T A M h Shl \ ANTENNA UNIT
DRAWN
m - •’?/ 1 *
FR-2125 W DWG . NO .
C3466-E01 - A
50x50x 50 x80x80
 D - 5
1 2 3 4

A A

B B

C C

D D

E E

F F
 D- 6
1 2 3 A

A A

B B

C C

D 0

p
F
 1 2 4

A A

B B

C C

0 D

I
 D - 8
1 2 3 i 4

A A

B B

c C

D D

c
 D - 9
1 2 3 4

A A

B B

C C

D 0

E E

F F
FURUNO ELECTRIC COM LTD.
 l 2 3 4 i 5 6

A A

B B

C C

D D

D
I

FURUNO ELECTRIC CO„ LTD.

 to
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
D
9 -52 Ashihara -Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan
Tel: +81 790-65-2111 Fax: +81 798-65-4200

Pub NO. DOC-259

Declaration of conformity to type

We FURUNO ELECTRIC CO ., LTD.
(Manufacturer)

9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City , 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan

(Address)

hereby declare under our sole responsibility that the product

Shipborne radar models FR-28X5 and shipborne radar/ARPA models FAR-28X5 series
(for details, see Configuration matrix at page 2/2 of this Declaration)

(Model names, type numbers)

to which this declaration relates conforms to the following standard(s) or normative document (s)

IMP Performance Standard IEC Test standard

IMO Resolution A.477 (XII) IEC 60936
IMO Resolution A.694 (17) IEC 60945
IMO Resolution A.813 (19) IEC 61162-1
IMO Resolution MSC.64(67) Annex 4
IMO Resolution A.422 (XI) IEC 60872
IMO Resolution A.823 (19) IEC 60872- 1
(title and/or number and date of issue of the standard (s) or other normative document (s))

For assessment, see EC - type approval certificate no. 6522/1058/1999 of 17 December 1999
issued by Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency, the Federal Republic of Germany

This declaration is issued according to the provisions of European Council Directive 96/98/EC on
marine equipment modified by Commission Directive 98/85/EC.

On behalf of Furuno Electric Co., Ltd.

Hroaki Komatsu
Nishinomiya City , Japan Manager,
January 6, 2000 International Rules and Regulations

(Place and date of issue) (name and signature or equivalent marking of authorized person)

1/2
 Configuration matrix of FR /FAR -28 X5 series
(This is part of Declaration of conformity to type DOC -259)
: l : : : :
: : :
Mode
: :
!$ I
tn ? in
s |
i
CO :II !
i Is 1 $
vM
il s S
\ CO : in l
• Q Q : CO s £2 J
'
s

_
: CO :

“^
00 j
CM CM : 53 : Ki ' cn :•« i s : C M s C M : CO :

^ ! i ? _ L : CM :
:
i
DC 2
InE !: DC : DC i• i
i

'
1<5 1<5 I DC : OC | nr- ;j
< < “<
•
LL u- : : LL • LE i LL :i i !
LL : LL i LL !:
• LL
• LL |
Designation : : : : : i
+
: : :

——
!
XN20AF x : x :
: x :
:
i X ; X | X i : i 6.5 ft , X- band
• « • •
»-
Scanner • • ~ 4*
• •
H
J : : :
•
:• • •
:
i x | 8 ft , X- band
XN24AF
SN7AF
X : X
:
:
X :
>
:
| X
- :
: X :
!*
:
I
:
:
i
X : X :
K

I x I x
I t
j 12 ft, S-band
:
i
: : :
4 - :
RTR-062 X : i l x i
:
:
! 12 kW , X-band, TR-up
- - 4: :-
j - « 9 : i
Transceiver RTR - 063 x | :
:
:
!- ! x : :
| 25 kW , X- band, TR- up
I
: :
4 : •4 »- t
i : :
RTR- 046 I X : : : : X j I 25 kW , X- band, TR-down
J* H *

: : : : : : i : :
RTR-066 :
:
:
:
X :s : :
:
:
: I X s j 30 kW , S- band , TR-up
*
• « • : •

RTR -047 : : : X \ : : : i x : 30 kW , S-band, TR-down

+
x is x ::
;
RSB -0074 x j x j i3 :
s :
! 24 VDC, 24 rpm
4 - -:t
: :
:
* •
i
i
-*
:
x j 380/440 VAC, 3 0, 400 W
RSB-0032 : I x j : : :

Turning unit
—— —— 4
j :] i;
i4
— !— —
i -i: — — —:
H
i :
RSB- 0026 : i x i ? X ! j 200/230 VAC, 3 0, 400 W

I! I -*

—
: : : : i
RSB-0031 I I>- x : j x | I 380/440 VAC , 3 0, 400 W

| 200— /230 VAC, 3 0, 400 W

j
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —— —
i :
: : -j K
: : i
RSB-0027 : : i
x j i
j x
-i« II-
i
:
-f j — t
I
^ j
:
I
*

!
RSB-0076 l x :i
:
--
s
: i I x : * s
-t
200/230 VAC, 3 0 , 150 W
:J
«4 4» H H MB) MM
^^B MB
^^B MM BMI
^Ml ^^B MV BM
*
: :
: :
RSB-0077 i x i
:
:
:
i
:
:
:
: I x i :
! | 380/ 440 VAC, 3 0, 150 W
: : : : : :

- :!!
i Radar display unit
Display unit RDP- 115 X x j x | x | x | : : i
-- •
4

!
• • •
—x i :
! "

RDP- 115 A I ! :
x I x j x
i
| x i Radar/ARPA display unit
*
AD- 100 x X
:
t
:
X | X | X
:
x j x j x | x | x | either one of AD- 100 (Gyro
: : i
“ " | !- " I i ""
1 converter) or GC-8 (Gyro
GC-8 X X I: X I X I X
Ancillary
: : i } ] interface)
equipment ^ ^ •* B "I
"
: •" B

:
PM-30 x x j X j j x j x j x Ii |
: j Performance monitor, X-band
: : • :
5 " j »" 5
i
PM-50 :
iJ- X -: X :
:
i I x j x •j Performance monitor, S- band

PSU-004
:

j x I
—x i 4

x
!
j j x i x j x
*t
-
•
i •
*
j Power supply unit
*
^•
9

: ^ : i ^ ^ : ^: ‘
j * •
RJ- 7 X X : X : X : X x j x i x j x i x i Interswitch

2/2
 FURUNO ELECTRIC CO. , LTD .
D 9- 52 Ashihara- Cho , Nishinomiya City, 662- 8580, Hyogo, Japan
Tel: +81 798 -65-2111 Fax: +81 798- 65- 4200

Pub NO. DOC- 406

Declaration of conformity

0735
We FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

( Manufacturer)

9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662 -8580, Hyogo , Japan

( Address)

hereby declare under our sole responsibility that the product

Shipborne radar and ARPA models FAR /FR -28 X5

(for details, see Configuration matrix at page 2 /2 of this Declaration)

(Model names, type numbers)

to which this declaration relates conforms to the following standard( s) or normative document ( s)

Standard Test standard

IMO Resolution A.477 (XII) IEC 60936
IMO Resolution A .694 (17) IEC 60945
IMO Resolution A.813 (19) IEC 61162 -1
IMO Resolution MSC.64(67) Annex 4 IEC 60936 - 1
IMO Resolution A .422 (XI) IEC 60872
IMO Resolution A.823 (19) IEC 60872 -1
IMO Resolution MSC.64(67) Annex 4, Appendix 2 IEC 60872- 3

(title and/or number and date of issue of the standard(s) or other normative document ( s) )

For assessment, see EC - type approval certificate no. 6522/1058/1999 of 17 December 1999 and its
annexes No. 1 of 30 March 2001 and No.2 of 30 November 2001 issued by Federal Maritime and
Hydrographic Agency, the Federal Republic of Germany

This declaration is issued according to the provisions of European Council Directive 96/98/EC on marine
equipment modified by Commission Directive 98 /85 /EC.

On behalf of Furuno Electric Co., Ltd.

Hiroaki Komatsu
Nishinomiya City, Japan Manager,
January 21, 2002 International Rules and Regulations

(Place and date of issue ) (name and signature or equivalent marking of authorized person)

1 /2
 Configuration matrix of FAR - 28 X 5 Series
(This is part of the Declaration of Conformity DOC-406 )

: : :
Model : *
i
: : • B

i
! I !%
> 5
LO
; .1 5
: LO LO
in ! in I s CO
r> | eg i eg : LO LC
5
: 3
£
i c/3
C/3 ! Uj
CO
LO
co Remarks
r
00
- j CM • CM
: 00 ! 00
00 : CO : 00 : CO
C\J : CVJ | CSJ : 06
: ro
CO : 00
: CO i :
00
CM
CM • eg • eg J. • '• • evj
' : 1 :l C\1 J :• LLnr- : rv~
CL : LL : LL LL
cc I: cr •S
Li.
ct
LL 11 ; <
< •
11 i < I 11C C ;i \DC1 ; 11 :!
11 I < <
Designation LL
: j i i i
11

: i : : : i
XN20AF x ! X : X ; X I
; X : X i i 6.5 Ft, X -band
H
: i s i
H
I
H j 5 1
: : ;
;s
;
XN24AF X X | X j X j X | X i : 8 ft, X-band
j :i
i i
Scanner : : :
—
SN7AF i ; i s v \
12 ft, S-band
+-+; i X :! X
: : s X : X :
:
H
: S : I i :
SN36AF :
:
:» : :
: X : X | X X
i 12 ft, S-band
S
: i i i : I i
RTR-062 X : : X : ! i 12 kW, X-band, TR -up
H
s
\ !
J
:
:
4:- :
:
... :
25 kW, X-band, TR -up
:
RTR -063 j X ; : t
: X :i :
S l t
1
s i : :
1
Transceiver
RTR -046
:
i
j
_ !_ x
:

:
»
i
:
:
I
• X
;
:
I
*
:
:
:
1-
\
1
i 25 kW, X -band, TR -down
:
RTR-066 :
| Ii x :
i X l \ 30 kW, S-band, TR -up
i
:
i i i
1
-i:
RTR -047 : : I x i X 30 kW, S-band, TR -down
i i
i :* !
RSB-0074 X i X
:
J
S
:
I X : x
:
i
J 1
:
; :
24 VDC, 24 rpm
I i : 5
RSB-0032 i: l
: :
j i
| X S X 380/440 VAC, 30, 400 W
H j - : : 1 ^ :
4:
RSB- 0026 i ! : X : x ! 220/230 VAC, 30, 400 W
i i r : i
! I : : : :
Turning unit RSB-0031 ! |
! i
i
i: x ii Ii X I 380/440 VAC, 3o, 400 W
:
i
s
- i
- : :
"5“ o j »
f

RSB-0027 j
i
s
i :
j
i
ij x j \ X 220/230 VAC, 30, 400 W
J

I- "V "I
: : i i i ; B

RSB-0076 x !: *
i
I: x i : i ! 220/230 VAC, 30, 150 W
»
:
4 i
: i : | ! I \
RSB-0077 S X • : Ii X { i S i 380/440 VAC, 30, 4150 W
: ! : i : s ;

Display unit RDP-115

:
X : X
:
!: x l
;
:
: ;
: X
:
:
t
i
X i i B Display unit
H
ij : : T :
RDP-115A i s x ** X x ! : \ x !! X
X
j
B
I
p
:
i i :
f
: 1
1 fJ
AD- 100/GC-8 x i: x !s x I: x I: x I x X : X :
: I
X ii X Either one of AD-100 ( Gyro
conveter) or GC-8 (Gyro
l
i :
:
:
!
:
i
i :
:
i: : I interface)
i
Other mandatory
equipment PM-30 V !
j
;
H

X
i
f
i
- i
j X j X
I :

X ij X
S
«
:
i
"
!
—
»
i
#

i 1i Performance monitor, X-band

A !
j j j j
: i i i i l
PM-50 !
:
i | x j x Performance monitor, S-band
I- B a

i x |; x
: :
PSU-004 i X : ! X i X ! X i Power supply unit
i : i : i
S
IF-2300 i X ; X i X : X
X ;
: :
X i X : X s
:
X :
i
X Interface unit
: :*
Optional equipment RJ-7 X : x s X X X X l X X : X * X Interswitch unit
• B i | | ! i

2 /2
 FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD .
9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan
Tel: +81 798-65- 2111 Fax: +81 798- 65-4200

Pub NO. DOC- 308

Declaration of Conformity
We FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

(Manufacturer)

9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662- 8580, Hyogo , Japan

(Address)

declare under our sole responsibility that the product

X-band radar and ARPA Models FR-2855 and FAR-2855 together with Power supply
unit PSU-001 and PSU-004, and Video plotter RP-25 for navigation
(Serial No. 3317- 0015 and 3328- 0016)

(Model name, serial number)

are in conformity with the essential requirements as described in the Directive

1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment (R&TTE Directive) and satisfies all the
technical regulations applicable to the product within this Directive

EN 60945: 1997-01 (IEC 60945 Third edition: 1996- 11 )

ITU R.R. App . S3 Table 2, Edition 1998

(title and/or number and date of issue of the standard(s) or other normative document(s))

For assessment , see

• Statement of Opinion N° 00214125/AA/00 of 2 January 2001 issued by KTL
Certification , The Netherlands
• Test reports 96312400 of 31 July 1996 and 95326200 of 25 March 1996 prepared
by Telefication , The Netherlands and TI- 1579 of 20 June 1996 prepared by Furuno
Electric Co. , Ltd.

On behalf of Furuno Electric Co. , Ltd.

Hirdaki Komatsu
Nishinomiya City , Japan Manager ,
January 15 , 2001 International Rules and Regulations

(Place and date of issue) (name and signature or equivalent marking of

authorized person)
 FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan
Tel: +81 798-65-2111 Fax: +81 798-65-4200

Pub NO. DOC- 309

We
Declaration of Conformity
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.

(Manufacturer)
C ( 0560
9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662- 8580, Hyogo, Japan

(Address)

declare under our sole responsibility that the product

X-band radar and ARPA Models FR-2855W and FAR -2855W together with Power
supply unit PSU-004 and Video plotter RP-25 for navigation
(Serial No. 3317-0015 and 3328-0016)

(Model name, serial number)

are in conformity with the essential requirements as described in the Directive

1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment (R&TTE Directive) and satisfies all the
technical regulations applicable to the product within this Directive

EN 60945: 1997-01 (IEC 60945 Third edition: 1996-11)

ITU R.R. App. S3 Table 2, Edition 1998

(title and/or number and date of issue of the standard(s) or other normative document (s))

For assessment, see

• Statement of Opinion N° 00214126/AA/00 of 3 January 2001 issued by KTL
Certification, The Netherlands
• Test reports 96312400 of 31 July 1996 and 95326200 of 25 March 1996 prepared
by Telefication, The Netherlands and TI-1655 of 1 October 1997 prepared by Furuno
Electric Co., Ltd.

On behalf of Furuno Electric Co., Ltd.

Hiroaki Komatsu
Nishinomiya City, Japan Manager,
January 15, 2001 International Rules and Regulations

(Place and date of issue) (name and signature or equivalent marking of

authorized person)
 FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD .
9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662-8580, Hyogo, Japan
Tel: +81 798 -65 - 2111 Fax: +81 798-65-4200

Pub NO. DOC- 310

We
Declaration of Conformity
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD. C £ 0560
(Manufacturer)

9-52 Ashihara-Cho, Nishinomiya City, 662- 8580, Hyogo, Japan

(Address)

declare under our sole responsibility that the product

S-band radar and ARPA Models FR-2865 SW and FAR-2865SW together with Power
supply unit PSU-004 and Video plotter RP-25 for navigation
(Serial No. 3328-0016)

(Model name, serial number)

are in conformity with the essential requirements as described in the Directive

1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council on radio equipment and
telecommunications terminal equipment (R&TTE Directive) and satisfies all the
technical regulations applicable to the product within this Directive

EN 60945: 1997-01 (IEC 60945 Third edition: 1996-11)

ITU R.R. App. S3 Table 2, Edition 1998

(title and/or number and date of issue of the standard(s) or other normative document(s))

For assessment, see

• Statement of Opinion N° 00214127/AA/00 of 3 January 2001 issued by KTL
Certification, The Netherlands
• Test reports 96312200 of 31 July 1996 prepared by Telefication, The Netherlands
and TI-1639 of 2 April 1997 prepared by Furuno Electric Co., Ltd.

On behalf of Furuno Electric Co., Ltd.

Y
Hiroaki Komatsu
Nishinomiya City, Japan Manager,
January 15, 2001 International Rules and Regulations

(Place and date of issue) (name and signature or equivalent marking of

authorized person)